Home

Lexicon MC-12 User's Manual

1. LIVE CALIBRATION TEST WILL BEGIN IN 10 PRESS SKIP COUNTDOWN LIVE CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS PLEASE WAIT r gt 3 0 to 3 0dB m LIVE CALIBRATION CALIBRATION DONE PRESS gt TO CONTINUE LIVE CALIBRATION SIGNAL TOO LOW PRESS gt TO CONTINUE Y 6 0 to 6 0dB lt 12 Appendix MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP Selecting listening mode opens the corresponding lis tening mode menu pages A 14 to A 16 The parameters on the left side of the listening mode menus differ from mode to mode The parameter set tings on the right side are adjustable The listening mode menus shown here indicate factory default parameter set tings for each listening mode Listening mode menu param eter drop down menus are shown on pages A 16 to A 17 MODE ADJUST FILM TV MUSIC MUSIC SURR OO PLilx Oo MOV Oo MUS OO PLII m Oo PLII MOVIE Oo PLII MUSIC OO PL Tex Oo PRO LOGIC Cres THX ses acs CIN Essi MUSIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO 5 5 1 MUSIC E MUSIC 5 1 MOV 5 1 MUS OO DIGITAL 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO dts C Cities re MUSIC Cities tax Em Ez MUSIC Cri
2. Parameter Possible Settings INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ANALOG AUTO ANALOG BYPASS ON OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO OFF S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON OFF COMPONENT OSD ON OFF Setup Lexicon CONFIGURING ADVANCED ZONE SETTINGS continued INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ANALOG AUTO Exc Ez Emm Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input connectors assigned to the current Main Zone input The table on the next page describes INPUT SELECT parameter settings Note When the Shift button activates the shift command bank the 7 5 button adjusts the INPUT SELECT parameter by cycling through the DIGITAL ANALOG and AUTO settings ANALOG BYPASS ES Ea mam aovancen anaon Forces analog sources to bypass A D conversion and internal processing When ON analog input signals pass directly to the Main Zone audio output connectors ON OFF e When a 2 channel analog source is present analog input signals pass directly to the Front L R output connectors e When a 5 1 channel analog source is present analog input signals pass to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in the tables on pages 2 7 and 3 59 e When LIVE is the selected analog input the MAIN ADVANCED INPUT SELECT parameter is forced to ANALOG and ANALOG BYPASS is disabled When OFF the MC 12 passes analog input signals through A D conversion and internal processing before passing them to the Main Zone au
3. 2 25 Status Menu Level Meters 2 26 Basic Operation Lexicon FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW The MC 12 is shown below The MC 12 Balanced is shown on page 2 4 The front panels are identical but the MC 12 Balanced has a larger chassis Standby Button Front Panel Display IR Receiver Volume Knob Mute Button Qv Uv cl COSS NO ox Mode and Buttons 7 Main Zone Input Selection Buttons 8 Main Zone Off Button 9 Zone 2 Input Selection Buttons 10 Zone 2 Off Button 11 Record Zone Input Selection Buttons 12 Record Zone Off Button 12 Basic Operation 1 STANDBY BUTTON Use the Standby button to activate or deactivate standby mode The Standby button performs no function when the MC 12 rear panel power switch is powered off When standby mode is activated all MC 12 zones that were active during the last session are reactivated The red LED in the standby button lights to indicate that standby mode is activated Power is still supplied to the MC 12 when it is put into standby mode 2 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Use the Front Panel display to view the current input listening mode input source and volume level The 2 x 20 character display also functions as a display for messages and menus 3 IR RECEIVER The IR Receiver receives infrared commands from the MC 12 remote control There are three associated LEDs e The amber LED blinks when a remote control command is received
4. Harman International Company IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with a dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radia tors heat registers stoves or another apparatus including amplifiers that produces heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are pro vided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience recepta cles and the point where they exit from the appara tus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer apparatus To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture Do not place objects containing liquid such as vases on this This triangle which appears on your component 12 Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When
5. OFF 30 to 12dB kb SURROUND ROLLOFF 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF HEN SURROUND DLY 0 to 15ms SURROUND EX AUTO ON OFF SURROUND MIX 5 to 50 EN 6 0dB 3 0dB 0 0dB Appendix Lexicon INSTALLATION WORKSHEET INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 LD SAT VCR CD PVR GAME TAPE TUNER AUX NAME DIGITAL IN ANALOG IN ANLG IN LVL VIDEO IN COMPONENT IN 2 CH DOD dts 5 1a MIC MAIN ADVANCED INPUT SELECT ANALOG BYPASS S VIDEO 16 9 S VIDEO 4 3 OSD COMPONENT OSD ZONE2 IN RECORD IN RECORD ADVANCED ANLG IN LVL DIGITAL BYPASS DIG OUT RATE RECORD A 20 12 Appendix SPEAKER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP THX SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATIONS FRONT LEFT RIGHT THX 80Hz CENTER THX 80Hz SIDE LEFT RIGHT THX 80Hz REAR LEFT RIGHT SUB LEFT RIGHT MONO SUB XOVER THX 80Hz LFE OFF THX ULTRA2SUB BGC ASA UNITS BASS PEAK LIMITERS CAL NOISE L R LIMITER L R LIMIT ADJ LFE LIMITER LFE LIMIT ADJ REAR PANEL CONFIG VOLUME CONTROL SETUP LOCK OPTIONS Circle one MAIN PWR ON MODES 8 STEREO INPUTS 5 STERE
6. 3 22 Calibrating Speaker Distances amp Output Levels 3 33 Speaker Calibration Parameters 3 33 Automatic Calibration esee 3 35 Manual Calibration 2 0 0 0 ie 3 52 Rear Panel Configuration eese 3 59 Display Setup 3 61 On Screen Display oerte 3 63 Front Panel Display eese 3 65 Volume Control 3 66 Trigger Setup a eee t eet ee 3 68 Lock Options erred esito bee brote tg 3 70 LIVE Calibration 2 etre tete retra 3 71 Introduction Lexicon Audio Controls Troubleshooting amp Maintenance Audio Coritrols Mei an a T EOD RE eet tut 4 2 Troubleshooting roe ae tte eite order es 6 2 Routine Maintenance 6 3 Mode Adjust Restoring Factory default 6 4 Mode Adjust r a HT eres 5 2 Listening Mode Activation ccccsscessseeseecessecesseeeeeeecsseeeeees 5 2 Appendix Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters 5 3 5 te turus A 2 Mode Buttons 5 4 Declaration of Conformity eese A 4 Mode Family Selection Buttons 5 4 QE lc
7. continued installation worksheet A 20 Internal Noise Test 3 52 IR input connector 2 10 IR receiver 2 3 L L R LIMIT parameter 3 57 3 58 A 21 L R LIMITER parameter 3 57 3 58 A 21 L7 button 5 4 L7 FILM listening mode 2 18 3 12 5 5 L7 MUSIC listening mode 5 4 5 6 L7 MUSIC SURR listening mode 5 6 L7 TV listening mode 5 4 5 5 LEDs IR receiver 2 3 level meters 3 10 LEVELS CALIBRATION A 21 LEVELS CALIBRATION menu 3 54 LEVELS option 3 35 Levels option 3 47 LFE LIMIT ADJ parameter 3 57 3 59 LFE LIMITER parameter 3 57 3 58 LFE MIX parameter 5 16 5 17 5 19 5 20 5 22 5 25 5 32 5 40 LFE parameter 3 26 3 30 3 34 5 35 LISTENER POS parameter 5 13 5 40 listening mode descriptions 5 5 listening mode parameter descriptions 5 37 LISTENING MODES Activating 5 2 Descriptions 5 5 parameter descriptions 5 37 Preferred 5 3 listening modes preferred 3 12 LIVE CALIBRATION menu 3 3 LIVE mode 5 33 LIVE Status Menu 2 24 LIVENESS parameter 5 11 5 41 LOCK OPTIONS menu 3 3 A 21 LOUDNESS parameter 4 2 4 6 LOW FREQ WIDTH parameter 5 12 5 41 low pass filter 3 23 M MAIN ADV menu 3 15 MAIN ADVANCED parameter 3 15 MAIN menu 2 11 MAIN PWR ON parameter 3 66 A 21 Main Zone 2 19 main zone audio output connectors 2 7 maintenance 6 3 manual audio adjustments 3 10 manual calibration 3 52 MANUAL parameter 3 9 3 10 MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu 3 52 MASTER LEVEL para
8. dits OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM NIGHTCLUB CENTER DEPTH 11 SPEECH DETECT ON SIZE 5m LIVENESS 196ms PRE DELAY 5 5 ROLLOFF 9 0kHz EFFECT LVL 3dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM CONCERT HALL CENTER DEPTH 12 SPEECH DETECT ON SIZE 20 LIVENESS 1 72ms PRE DELAY OFF ROLLOFF 2 4kHz EFFECT LVL 2dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM CHURCH CENTER DEPTH 5 SPEECH DETECT ON SIZE 20m MID RT 1 56s BASS RT 1 87s PRE DELAY 24ms ROLLOFF 2 4kHz EFFECT LVL 3dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM CATHEDRAL CENTER DEPTH 12 SPEECH DETECT ON SIZE 30m MID RT 3 72s BASS RT 4 415 PRE DELAY 23ms ROLLOFF 3 1kHz EFFECT LVL 8dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM PANORAMA EFFECT LVL 4dB BASS CONTENT STEREO LOW FREQ WIDTH 0 SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms INPUT BALANCE lt I gt CALIBRATION OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 2 CH SURROUND OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 2 CHANNEL SUB L R LVL 0dB CUSTOM MONO LOGIC EFFECT LVL 90 ACADMY FILTER ON SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM MONO SURROUND OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM SUB L R LVL 0dB CUSTOM A 15 Appendix Lexicon MENU TREE continued 5 1 rz FILM VOCAL ENHANCE FRONT STEERING RE EQUALIZER SOUND STAGE 5 SPKR ENHANCE BASS ENHANCE SURR ROLLOFF REAR DLY OFFSET COMPRESSION LFE OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 115 TV VOCAL ENHANCE FRONT STEERING RE EQUALIZER SOUND STAGE 5 SPKR ENHANCE BASS ENHANCE SURR ROLLOFF REAR DLY OFFSET COMPRESSION LFE MIX OUTP
9. arrow button performs no function When a drop down menu is open press the arrow button to select the current setting and close the drop down menu Qo When a menu is open press the or arrow buttons to scroll upward or downward through the complete list of menu items All menu items are displayed on screen A scroll bar appears on the right side of the menu when menu items exceed the top and bottom margins of the display and the cursor automatically advances to the next menu item when the first or last menu item is passed The highlighted menu item is displayed on the MC 12 front panel MENU ITEM SELECTION 2 When the desired menu item is highlighted press the arrow Use the remote control Menu arrows to select menu items button to select the highlighted item If you select an option another menu displays If you select a parameter a parameter menu or horizontal graph opens To select a menu item 1 Press the remote control or arrow buttons to highlight the desired menu item Basic Operation Lexicon MENU OPTIONS Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu structure For example selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION MENU PARAMETERS Selecting a menu parameter ope
10. 1 Setthe SPL Meter to C weighting and SLOW response 2 Place the SPL Meter at the primary listening position Press the a or v arrow button to highlight the output level parameter you want Then press the button to select this output level parameter The horizontal bar graph shown on page 3 54 displays 4 Begin playback of the external calibration source and press the a Or v arrow button to select the output level that achieves 75dB SPL Meter reading 5 After selecting the output level press the arrow button to close the horizontal bar graph 6 Repeat steps 2 3 and 4 until you have set all the output levels you want 3 56 12 Setup SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERS EX c ELE manuau e EGET e BASS PEAK The BASS PEAK LIMITERS option displays the BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu to set amplitude limits on low frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output Subwoofer L R and LFE connectors This menu also sets amplitude limits on low frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors The MC 12 is equipped with an internal limiter to prevent low frequency signals from exceeding a designated output level This is essential for Dolby Digital and DTS ES sources that produce low frequency signal peaks at much higher output levels than 2 channel sources In home theaters there is a danger of the subwoofers and their associated amplifiers overloading when attempting to reproduce l
11. SLSR LPE 0 6 ES 0 NM NN 45 2CH STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE 5 1a BYPASS STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE OOD STATUS INPUT MODE CHANNELS BIT RATE EX ENCODING dBL C R SLSR LFE 0 6 a B 45 2CH BYPASS STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE Refer to the Restoring Factory Default Settings section that begins on page 6 4 for more information D STATUS SAMPLE RATE 2 0 ENCODING DIALOG OFFSET MIX ROOM CENTER MIX LVL SURR MIX LVL DIGITAL STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE A 18 12 Appendix INPUT BALANCE L lt lt l gt gt R SS 5 to 5dB 20 0 or 10 0 to 0 00B 127 0 127 30ms to 20 25 LOW FREQ WIDTH 24ms to 24 35 PANORAMA OFF PRE DELAY OFF 1 to 100ms 1 RE EQUALIZER 25 to 425 kh ON OFF REAR DLY OFFSET OFF 1 to 30ms 4 to 20 or 30ms OFF 30 to 12dB FRONT NEUTRAL REAR PRESS RIGHT gt RIGHT TO RESTORE MODE LEFT amp RIGHT LEFT 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF 10 to 90deg kM OFF 30 to 12dB ON OFF OFF 30 to 12dB
12. Schlie en Sie niemals Stromausgange des Audioverstarkers direkt an das Ger t an Zur Vermeidung von elektrischen Schl gen oder Brandgefahr darf das Ger t weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt oder an Orten betrieben werden wo es mit Wasser in Ber hrung kommen kann Versuchen Sie nie das Ger t zu betreiben wenn es fallen gelassen besch digt oder Fl ssigkeiten ausgesetzt wurde oder wenn ein deutlicher Leistungsunter schied zu verzeichnen ist der darauf hinweist dass es gewartet werden muss Dieser Apparat sollte nur von qualifizierten Fachleuten ge ffnet werden Das Abne hmen von Abdeckungen setzt Sie gef hrlichen Spannungen aus nung kann so hoch sein dass das Risiko eines Stromschlags besteht Dieses Dreieck welches auf Ihrem Bauteil angebracht ist macht Sie auf This triangle which appears on your component alerts you to the presence AN of uninsulated dangerous voltage inside the enclosure voltage that may be wichtige Betriebs und Wartungshinweise in diesen Hinweisen aufmerksam Dieses Dreieck welches auf Ihrem Bauteil angebracht ist warnt Sie vor dem AN Vorhandensein nicht isolierter gef hrlicher Spannung im Ger t Diese Span Introduction Lexicon ESPANOL INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES Guarde estas instrucciones para futuras referencias Siga todas las instrucciones y tenga en cuenta las advertencias que aparecen en la unidad y en las instrucciones de funcionamiento Util
13. e The red LED lights when the A D converters are overloading e The blue LED lights when the MC 12 is powered on activated even if the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF Red LED Blue LED Amber LED 4 VOLUME KNOB Use the Volume knob to adjust volume level in all zones Note When MC 12 output levels are properly calibrated the 0dB volume level setting corresponds to the THX reference level 75 To adjust the Main Zone volume level Rotate the volume knob clockwise or counter EXE clockwise to increase or decrease the volume level in 1dB increments A horizontal bar graph indicating the current Main Zone volume level appears in the on screen and front panel displays The Main Zone volume range is 80 to 124 To adjust the Zone 2 or Record Zone volume level 1 Press and hold the front panel Zone 2 or Record Zone input selection button that corresponds with the current input source For example if the current input source is DVD1 press and hold the DVD1 input selection button 2 Push and hold a Zone 2 or Record Zone input selection button while rotating the E volume knob clockwise or counter clockwise to increase or decrease volume 571017777771 level in 1dB increments A horizontal bar graph appears on the on screen and front panel displays The Zone 2 or Record Zone volume range is 80 to 12dB 3 When the Zone 2 or Record Zone volume level has b
14. FULL FULL SUB 30Hz to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE EG BIEN EERE O custom seTuP A REAR LR Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector labeled REAR L R when a custom speaker setup is selected Opens the REAR L R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the REAR L R output connectors Select FULL to send a full range signal to the rear speakers Otherwise select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the rear speakers Select FULL SUB to send a full range signal to the rear speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB L R outputs The set crossover point of the SUB L R parameter determines the upper range of duplicate bass Selecting the FULL SUB option can result in excessive bass Select NONE when the speaker setup does not include rear speakers The MC 12 then redirects rear channel signals to the Side L R output connectors If the SIDE L R parameter is also set to NONE surround channel signals are sent to the Front L R output connectors CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP THX SETUP VAN D THX SETUP FRONT L R CENTER THX SPEAKER SETUP ICAUTION PRESSING THE gt BUTTON WILL AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz SIDE L R THX 80Hz REAR L R THX 80Hz THE OUTPUTS TO A THX SUB L R MONO 2002 SPEAKER SUB XOVER THX 80Hz CONFIGURATION LFE OFF THX ULTRA2 SUB OFF THX REAR SPEAKERS THX 80Hz NONE When a THX speaker setup is selected the REAR
15. Level meters appear in combinations of green yellow and red when the on screen display is configured for a blue screen background Green indicates low levels yellow indicates normal levels and red indicates high levels and the onset of overload Level meters appear in white when the on screen display is not configured for a blue screen background 2 26 ei Ur 3 2 3 4 Changing Input Names 3 5 Assigning Audio amp Video Input Connectors 3 7 Selecting Preferred Listening Modes ssesseeeeee e 3 12 Configuring Advanced Input Settings 3 15 INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings essen een 3 17 ZONE2 amp RECORD IN Parameter Settings eese 3 19 scc Mii 3 22 Setting Crossover Points eere eeu eee aa eet etna eoo n 3 22 Calibrating Speaker Distances amp Output Levels 3 33 Speaker Calibration Parameters sess 3 33 Automatic Calibration n eoe ar code 3 35 Calibration s c cisssisisesissstslsiststetsceahcecstetecesscededceetececevecesecteessveees 3 52 Configuration 3 cssdescenspek UF CE OUA REPE EE ERR 3 59 Display spp ite REAPER ER RAUS 3 61 O
16. Selects the TUNER input for the Main Zone Selects the TUNER input for Zone 2 Selects the TUNER input for the Record Zone Decreases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu TREBLE parameter in 0 5dB increments Selects the AUX input for the Main Zone Selects the AUX input for Zone 2 Selects the AUX input for the Record Zone Decreases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu TILT EQ parameter in 0 2dB increments 2 15 Basic Operation Lexicon Toggles the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter between ALWAYS OFF and the current setting Sets Zone 2 volume level to 15dB Sets Record Zone volume level to 15dB Sets Main Zone volume level to 15dB SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter between ALWAYS OFF and the current setting future expansion 6 Toggles the ON SCREEN Sets Zone 2 volume Sets Record Zone Sets Main Zone volume DISPLAY menu BACK level to 30dB volume level to 30dB level to 30dB GROUND parameter between ON and OFF Toggles the ON Reserved for possible Reserved for possible Sets the AUDIO future expansion CONTROL menu BASS TREBLE and TILT EQ parameters to 0 0 However the screen displays EQ BALANCE EQ OFF Scroll to the previous or next available listening mode with the current Main Zone input source Scrolling occurs in the order shown on the MODE ADJUST menu Activates and deactivates the trigger output connector labele
17. Store salesperson lt gt Advertisement C Colleague C Store display c Magazine Article lt Teacher Received as a gift lt gt Own other Lexicon products Which of the following were most important in the selection of this product lt gt Sound C Quality C Value for price Durability lt D Features lt gt Brandname C Other What are your three favorite magazines 1 2 What are your three favorite websites 1 2 What features would you like to see added to this product in the future MC 12 05 05 AL1VIO3dS NVINHVH NOILVHISIO3H 986 0 4L0 qQHO3Q38 o gt 2 m r v 2 w lt gt o 2 o o m m m 2 o gt o o z r 2 z o o w m 2 gt A1d38 SSANISNG 31 AHVSS3O3N 491504 ON exicon H A Harman International Company 541715 G3LINN 3 Oak Park Drive Bedford MA 01730 1413 USA Tel 781 280 0300 Fax 781 280 0490 www harmanspecialtygroup com Customer Service 781 280 0300 5 5 781 280 0495 Service Fax 781 280 0499 Product Shipments 16 Progress Road Billerica MA 01821 5730 USA Part No 070 14773 Rev 4 05 05
18. The 5 1 channel connector is not available Input sources that were assigned to the 5 1 channel connector are reassigned to the stereo connector labeled 6 3 59 Setup Lexicon 5 STEREO amp 5 1 ANLG Select the 5 STEREO amp 5 1 ANLG option to configure the analog audio input connectors as five stereo and one 5 1 channel connectors When 5 STEREO amp 5 1 ANLG is selected e The 5 1 channel connector should only be used with 5 1 channel analog sources such as DVD As and SACDs e The analog audio input connectors labeled 1 2 3 4 and 5 are configured as stereo connectors e The analog audio input connectors labeled 6 7 and 8 are configured as 5 1 channel connectors e Input sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors labeled 6 7 and 8 are reassigned to conform to the 5 1 channel configuration 5 1 channel input is sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in the table below Input Connector s Output Connector s L amp R Front L R C Center SUB Subwoofer L R amp LFE LS amp RS Side L R amp Rear L R 3 60 12 Setup DISPLAY SETUP EX The DISPLAYS option displays the DISPLAY SETUP menu to customize the on screen and front panel displays restore audio video synchroni zation and create and activate a custom unit name MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG
19. The MC 12 also offers LIVE Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment designed to transform the way your listening room sounds with the live sound that is created within the room by the occupants of the room LIVE does not nor is it meant to work with pre recorded material LIVE provides a realistic illusion of a larger more reverberant listening space ideal for musicians wishing to practice or perform with the sound of a larger venue LIVE is a unique sophisticated reverberation system that uses a combination of microphones and digital signal processing DSP to enhance a room s acoustics and create the illusion of a much larger space When you engage in normal conversation it seems as if you are in a large room When you practice or perform with a musical instrument it seems as if you are in a concert hall Choose from one of three customizable presets to create an ambiance to liven up a party or amaze your friends In addition to Logic 7 and LIVE the MC 12 is also equipped with Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic DTS 96 24 DTS NEO 6 DTS ES THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding THX Ultra2 Certification guarantees that the MC 12 meets the highest THX performance specifications With four 32 bit floating point SHARC digital signal processing DSP engines the MC 12 offers unparalleled processing power These DSP engines perform custom Lexicon processing such as Logic
20. audio input connector for each input The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to control the interaction of these connectors as well as other advanced Main Zone Zone 2 and Record Zone input settings Parameter Possible Settings MAIN ADVANCED Refer to the next column ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ANLG DMIX RECORD IN DIGITAL ANLG DMIX RECORD ADVANCED Refer to 3 20 MAIN ADVANCED 9 Dvor c mann avancen The MAIN ADV menu controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input connectors assigned to the current Main Zone input and other advanced Main Zone input settings DVD1 INPUT SETUP DVD1 MAIN ADV DIGITAL EAA aT gt SANA ETERNA oe ANALOG NAME DVD1 INPUT SELECT DIGITAL AUTO DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOG BYPASS ANALOG IN NONE S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO AUTO ANLG IN LVL AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 UE OFF VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT OSD OFF COMPONENT IN 1 ON 2 CH 191 FILM OFF DaD 5 1 121 FILM Ems 15 FILM AE 5 1a 122 FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL DIGITAL RECORD IN UM RECORD ADVANCED DMIX The parameters on the left side of the MAIN ADV menu are identical regardless of which input is selected The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable The MAIN ADV menu shown in the Appendix indicates factory default parameter settings for each input
21. 27dBFS 27 to 4dB ES ENCODING Indicates whether or not a DTS ES encoded source is detected When the parameter setting is DISCRETE a discrete 6 1 channel DTS ES source is detected When the parameter setting is MATRIX a 5 1 channel DTS ES source with a surround encoded back channel is detected When the parameter setting is OFF a standard DTS source with no DTS ES encoding is detected DISCRETE MATRIX OFF EX ENCODING Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded source is detected When the parameter setting is MATRIX a 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX is detected When the parameter setting is NONE a standard 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected The MC 12 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non flagged input sources MATRIX NONE 2 25 Basic Operation Lexicon INPUT Indicates the selected input for example DVD1 INPUT TYPE Indicates the input source that is present When the parameter setting is ANLG a 2 channel analog audio source is present and the ADVANCED menu 2 CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to OFF When the parameter setting is BYP Bypass a 2 channel analog audio source is present and the 2 CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON When the parameter setting is PCM a 2 channel digital audio source is present When the parameter setting is MIC a micro p
22. 4 arrow button 4 Press the and arrow buttons to highlight the desired to cancel the microphone check microphone parameter The MC 12 refers to the microphones according to the input connector to which the microphone is The MC 12 uses the calibration noise signal to eliminate micro connected phones that register the signal at a level that is too low or too 5 Pressthe arrow button to view more detailed results for the high Then the MC 12 determines the appropriate output level for the calibration noise signal used during automatic calibration CHECK MICROPHONES Results Appears on screen when the MC 12 is finished checking the microphones This display indicates the individual check results for each microphone An OK result indicates that the microphone passed the microphone check ERROR result indicates that the microphone did not pass the microphone check CHECK MICROPHONES MICROPHONE MIC 1 0K OK MIC 2 MIC 3 ERROR MIC 4 OK PRESS gt TO VIEW DETAILS selected microphone A message similar to the one shown at the bottom of the previous column opens in the on screen display Refer to the table on the next page for information about all possible microphone check messages Note the following The MC 12 retains the calculated microphone level until the SPEAKER SETUP menu is closed Once this menu is closed another microphone check is required before automatic cali bration can be
23. 5 1a 2 CHANNEL modes 5 to 5dB MID RT Works with the SIZE parameters to adjust the amount of time required for mid frequency information to decay below 60dB in level The full parameter range might not be available depending on the SIZE parameter setting Available in CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes 24ms to 24 3s CAUTION Setting the BASS RT MID RT or SIZE parameters to a high value may produce undesirable or damaging audio OUTPUT LEVELS Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu which is used to adjust output levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Center Subwoofer L R LFE Side L R and Rear L R Refer to page 5 32 for more information Available in all except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes PANORAMA ON OFF When set to ON Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listening modes extend the front stereo image to include surround channel signals which creates a wraparound effect with side wall imaging Available in DPLII MUSIC and DPLIIx MUSIC modes Note The PANORAMA parameter within the Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listening modes should not be confused with the separate PANORAMA listening mode page 5 12 PRE DELAY Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of rever beration Higher settings make the simulated space sound larger Because some pre delay is inherent in all source material you
24. 5 1a rz MUSIC 5 1 HX 5 1a STANDARD 5 1 2 CHAN USE LAST DVD1 MIC MODE LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE USE LAST cate AUTO OFF DIGITAL gt ANALOG p AUTO 1 EIE INPUT SELECT DIGITAL 1 e ANALOG BYPASS OFF 4 S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO yam S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT OSD OFF 1 L ON d OFF 1 1 r ANLGINLVL DIGITAL DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz oe RECORD ENABLED 1 LI EN BLOCKED gt ENABLED 1 INPUT 96kHz le p 88 2kHz 48kHz 44 1kHz 18 to 12dB L gt 7 Lexicon Appendix MENU TREE continued INPUT SETUP The MAIN ADV and RECORD ADV menus indicate MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP DVD1 MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ANALOG BYPASS OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT 050 OFF DVD2 MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ANALOG BYPASS OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT 050 OFF LD MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT AUTO ANALOG BYPASS S VIDEO 16 9 S VIDEO OSD 4 3 COMPONENT OSD TV MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT ANALOG BYPASS S VIDEO 16 9 S VIDEO OSD 4 3 COMPONENT OSD INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION SAT MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT AUTO ANALOG BYPASS OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT 050 OFF VCR MAIN ADV INPUT
25. 7 0kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1 to 30ms OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions LZ MUSIC SURR m EE This listening mode is designed for playback of 2 channel stereo music sources recorded in real spaces and for playback of recordings that contain added reverb It is recommended for classical music sources which are often recorded in real spaces with added reverb to enhance the stereo mix LOGIC 7 MUSIC SURR is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that is similar to the MUSIC SURROUND listening mode in other Lexicon products Logic 7 extracts ambient sounds from the input source and sends these sounds to all speakers Ambient sounds are heard from all directions creating a realistic playback presentation that simulates what listeners experience in real spaces Parameter VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0 FRONT STEERING MSURR Default Setting Possible Settings 6 0 3 0dB 0 0dB OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL FRONT NEUTRAL REAR 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF OFF 1 to 30ms Refer to page 5 35 Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 1
26. 7 decoding bass enhancement dialog enhancement auto azimuth 5 speaker enhancement bass management high precision digital crossovers and tone controls This processing is available at sample rates up to 96kHz with 24 bit resolution to retain top performance from all input sources and listening modes A fifth DSP engine is dedicated to decoding multi channel compressed audio sources 1 2 12 Getting Started High precision 24 bit 96kHz A D converters can be used to convert stereo and 5 1 analog audio input signals to digital signals allowing the MC 12 to provide the benefits of precise digital signal processing without sacrificing signal integrity Alternatively stereo and 5 1 analog signals can bypass A D conversion and internal processing to remain in the analog domain straight to the output connectors Digital audio input signals are processed through a two stage phase lock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection Lexicon s proprietary auto azimuth technology corrects timing and level imbalances in stereo sources ensuring exceptionally accurate playback of surround encoded sources A digital audio pass through option is available for recording digital signals with a CD recorder or a similar component Complementing its audio performance the MC 12 features two broadcast quality video switchers An ultra wide bandwidth component video switcher accepts analog component or RGB video signals while
27. ADJUST INPUTS DVD1 NAME DVD1 AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS DIGITAL IN COAX 1 SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH 191 FILM 5 112 FILM a E VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION 5 1a 5 1a 7 FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section Whenever it appears any other INPUT SETUP menu can be substituted Likewise whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path any other input can be substituted All INPUT SETUP menus are shown in the Appendix on page 6 The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of which input is selected The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable The INPUT SETUP menus shown in the Appendix indicate factory default parameter settings for each input 3 4 12 Setup CHANGING INPUT NAMES Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the INPUT NAME menu to customize or restore the factory default name of the selected input Factory default input names correspond to front panel and remote control input selection button labels MAIN MENU SETUP INPUT SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS DVD1 AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS
28. B DTE Ed lt Eres MUSIC OFF settings for both connectors 8 STEREO INPUTS FOR REAR PANEL CFG 5 ST amp 1 5 1 ANLG FOR REAR PANEL CFG 1 NIGHTCLUB OFF 10dB LOCKED an CONCERT HHALL OFF 20dB UNLOCKED CHURCH 30dB CATHEDRAL OFF 40dB PANORAMA OFF continued on page A 6 FULL MUTE EAMES _ 2 CH SURROUND STATUS ALWAYS ON pita 2 CHANNEL OFF BRIGHTNESS DUUM MONO LOGIC OFF MONO SURROUND OFF SPEAKER SETUP 100 Fog _ Fog 1 FILM OFF SETUP CROSSOVERS DISPLAY SETUP 75 l TEN OFF CHECK MICROPHONES ON SCREEN DISPLAY 5 11 MUSIC AUTOMATIC FRONT PANEL DISPLAY 9 1 IEZ 34 OFF M SYNC DELAY CUSTOM NAME ON SCREEN DISPLAY ALWAYS ON pem 5 1 PLilx MUS OFF SETICHCSSCYERS EDIT cusTOM NAME PORNO AN DIGITAL EX OFF BEFORE CALIBRATING 1 TSA gt 2 SECONDS POSITION TOP ALWAYS OFF i continued on page A 9 1 EDIT CUSTOM ntsc 5 1 MONO LOGIC OFF Y BACKGROUND on TOP OFF 1 to 60ms BSS CENTER 4 BUTTONS TO EDIT BOTTOM UP TO 20 CHARACTERS i ON ON BUTTON TO ADVANCE OFF SECAM OFF L gt
29. CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SETTING DISTANCES FRONT LEFT 12 0ft CENTER 10 5ft FRONT RIGHT 12 0ft SIDE RIGHT 4 5ft SETTING LEVELS SETTING LEVELS FRONT LEFT FRONT LEFT 2 00B CENTER CENTER ERROR FRONT RIGHT FRONT RIGHT EA SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT ER REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT MONO SUB SUB RIGHT LFE REAR RIGHT ERROR REAR LEFT 6 0ft SIDE LEFT 4 5ft MONO SUB SUB RIGHT N A REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHT 3 00B REAR LEFT H REAR LEFT 3 0dB SIDE LEFT SIDE LEFT ER MONO SUB MONO SUB N A SUB RIGHT SUB RIGHT N A LFE LFE N A DISTANCES DISTANCES amp LEVELS LEVELS The SETTING DISTANCES screen displays when the MC 12 calibrates speaker distances This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS option is During speaker distance calibration the MC 12 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone Selected audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING DISTANCES screen The cursor auto matically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters highlighting each parameter while the MC 12 calculates a distance for the corresponding speaker As it finishes each parameter the MC 12 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label Because of the way low frequency signals propagate in most listening spaces automatic speaker dis tance calibration often produces unreliable results for subwoofers and LFE subwoofers
30. CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions MC 12 Mode Adjust DOPRO LOGIC THX TANN e The Dolby PRO LOGIC mode is designed for playback of Dolby Surround encoded sources It decodes four channels from Dolby Surround encoded sources and uses a mono surround channel with a high frequency rolloff above 7kHz This mode is useful for comparison purposes particularly with the L7 FILM Dolby PLIIx MOVIE and DTS Neo 6 CIN listening mode Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions e BEEN This mode is designed for playback of matrix encoded digital stereo film sources DTS NEO 6 derives six channels when both side and rear speakers are present rear channels will be in parallel It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers are present In addition to THX processing THX re equalization is applied to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and may sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option am
31. CUSTOM menu 5 35 5 38 21 CUSTOM NAME parameter 3 61 CUSTOM parameter 5 38 CUSTOM VS PRESET option 5 35 5 38 D Declaration of Conformity A 4 DIALOG OFFSET parameter 2 25 DIG OUT RATE parameter 3 20 A 20 Dig Out Rate parameter 3 21 digital audio input connectors 2 7 DIGITAL BYPASS parameter 3 20 A 20 DIGITAL IN parameter 3 7 DIGITAL Status menu 2 24 DIMENSION parameter 5 8 5 38 DISPLAY SETUP menu 3 2 3 61 DISTANCES amp LEVELS option 3 35 3 47 DISTANCES option 3 47 documentation conventions 1 ii DOLBY button 5 4 DOLBY D parameter 3 13 Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode 5 21 5 22 Dolby DIGITAL listening mode 5 4 5 21 5 22 Dolby DIGITAL parameter 3 12 3 13 Dolby Digital status menu 2 21 DOLBY PLII THX listening mode 5 4 5 7 5 8 DOLBY PLII MOVIE listening mode 5 4 5 7 DOLBY PLII MUSIC listening mode 5 8 DOLBY PLIIx THX listening mode 5 7 DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode 5 7 5 20 DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode 5 8 5 20 DOLBY PRO LOGIC listening mode 5 9 DTS button 5 4 DTS listening mode 5 27 DTS Neo 6 CIN listening mode 5 10 DTS Neo 6 FILM listening mode 5 4 DTS Neo 6 MUSIC listening mode 5 10 5 14 DTS status menu 2 22 DTS THX MUSIC listening mode 5 27 DTS THX UL2 Cin listening mode 5 26 DTS ES 2 CHAN listening mode 5 28 DTS ES DECODING parameter 5 24 DTS ES L7 FILM listening mode 3 12 5 4 5 24 DTS ES L7 MUSIC listening mode 5 4 5 25 DTS E
32. ES 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes 30 to 12dB OFF RESET MODE Restores the factory default version of the selected listening mode restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory default settings Available in all modes REVERB LVL Controls the amount of added reverb Available in all LIVE modes 80 to 0dB OFF ROLLOFF Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real space It is recommended that you begin with a low setting to simulate high frequency absorptive spaces Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF SHAPE 0TO4 Controls the buildup of the energy that most audibly creates the sound of a real room SHAPE and SPREAD work together if either is set to zero the other has no effect Available in all LIVE modes SIDE L R Controls the level of the Side L R audio output connectors in the Main Zone Available in all except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes 30 to 12dB OFF SIZE 4 to 20 or 30m Adjusts the length of the listening space within a 4m to 20m or 30m range depending on the listening mode Increase the size of the space to increase the reverb effect Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes CAUTION Setting the BASS RT MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high value may produce undesirable o
33. L R LFE Side L R and B Rear L R The OUTPUT LEVELS option does not appear on listening mode menus when the selected listening mode does not accommodate multi channel output signals Instead an output specific parameter appears For example the MONO listening mode menu includes a SUB L R LVL parameter Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB SIDE L R 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB REAR L R 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB SUB 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB LFE 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions CUSTOM Opens the CUSTOM menu shown below which can be used to compare custom and factory default versions of the selected listening mode and to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode CUSTOM VS PRESET CO e Listening mode e CUSTOM Q CUSTOM vS PRESET Allows comparison listening between the custom and factory default versions of the selected listening mode When PRESET is selected the listening mode is heard in its factory default condition as if all listening mode menu parameters were set to their factory default settings When CUSTOM is selected the listening mode is heard it its custom condition including all current listening mode menu parameter settings The PRESET and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode will sound identical when all listening mode menu
34. L R parameter opens the THX REAR SPEAKERS menu shown above to activate and deactivate the REAR L R output connectors Select THX 80Hz to activate and configure the Rear L R output connectors for a 7 1 channel THX speaker setup Select NONE to deactivate the Rear L R output connectors configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a 5 1 channel THX speaker setup Note When the REAR L R parameter is set to NONE Dolby Digital Surround EX THX Ultra2 THX Surround EX and PLIIx modes DTS ES decoding and the ASA parameter are not available 3 29 Setup Lexicon SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS continued SUB L R MONO STEREO NONE Configures the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled SUBWOOFER L R for a speaker setup that includes one two or no subwoofer s When a custom speaker setup is selected the SUB L R parameter opens the SUBWOOFERS L R menu to select a configuration for the SUBWOOFER L R output connectors e Select MONO if the speaker setup includes one subwoofer The MC 12 sends low frequency front center and surround channel signals to the SUBWOOFER L R output connectors e Select STEREO if the speaker setup includes two subwoofers The MC 12 sends low frequency front left center and surround left channel signals to the SUBWOOFER L output connector and low frequency front right center and surround right channel signals to the SUBWOOFER R output connector e Select NONE if the speaker set
35. PAL NTSC A 5 Appendix Lexicon MENU TREE continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 2 CH 5 1 MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED DVD2 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD2 DIGITAL IN COAX 2 ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 2 COMPONENT IN 2 CH IP 5 1a MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION LD INPUT SETUP NAME LD DIGITAL IN COAX 3 ANALOG IN ANALOG 1 ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 3 COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH FILM ey 5 1 rz FILM EE des COMTI FILM 5 1a 5 1a rz FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG RECORD IN ANLG RECORD ADVANCED TV_INPUT SETUP NAME DIGITALIN OPTICAL 1 ANALOGIN ANALOG 2 ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 4 COMPONENT IN 2 CH LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG RECORD IN ANLG RECORD ADVANCED SAT INPUT SETUP NAME SAT DIGITAL IN OPTICAL 2 ANALOG IN ANALOG 3 ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 5 COMPONENT IN 4 2 CH m pop 5 1 rz TV fits CoM ie 5 1a 5 1a rz FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG RECORD IN ANLG RECOR
36. PANEL DISPLAY AN SYNC DELAY OFF CUSTOM NAME OFF EDIT CUSTOM NAME To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph 1 When the horizontal bar graph appears press the remote control Or v arrow button to increase or decrease the setting in designated increments The setting appears to the right of the parameter name in the on screen and front panel displays 2 When you have finished adjusting the settings press arrow button to select the setting and close the horizontal bar graph 2 12 12 Basic Operation COMMAND BANK ACTIVATION Remote control buttons perform different commands depending on whether the Main Zone Zone 2 Record Zone or Shift command bank is activated Pressing and releasing a remote control command bank selection button MAIN ZONE REC or SHIFT activates the corresponding command bank The selected command bank remains activated until another command bank is activated The command bank selection buttons themselves do not send commands to the MC 12 When pressed and released these buttons activate the corresponding command bank For example pressing and releasing the SHIFT button activates the Shift command bank When the Shift command bank is activated pressing and releasing the DVD 1 button turns off the DVD1 input for the Main Zone To activate a command bank 1 Press and release a command bank selection button to activate the desired command b
37. SELECT ANALOG ANALOG BYPASS OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT OSD OFF CD MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ANALOG BYPASS OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT 050 OFF PVR MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT AUTO ANALOG BYPASS OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT OSD OFF DVD1 2 LD VCR CD PVR GAME TAPE TUNER AUX GAME MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT AUTO ANALOG BYPASS OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT 050 OFF TAPE MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT ANALOG BYPASS S VIDEO 16 9 S VIDEO OSD 4 3 COMPONENT OSD TUNER MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT ANALOG ANALOG BYPASS OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT 050 OFF AUX MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ANALOG BYPASS OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT OSD OFF CD INPUT SETUP NAME CD DIGITAL IN COAX 4 ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN COMPOSITE 1 COMPONENT IN 2 CH dts E 5 1a 5 1a r5 FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED DVD1 RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD ENABLED DVD2 RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD ENABLED LD RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT 44 1kHz RECORD ENABLED TV RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD ENABLED factory default parame
38. SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING ON OFF APART CLOSE TOGETHER CENTER SPEAKERS FULL FULL SUB 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz NONE CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP 5 c R sA D 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz mer K wA aD 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz THX SPEAKER SETUP CAUTION PRESSING THE BUTTON WILL AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE THE OUTPUTS TO A THX SPEAKER CONFIGURATION SIDE L R SPEAKERS FULL FULL SUB 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz NONE THX SETUP FRONT L R THX 80Hz CENTER THX 80Hz SIDE L R THX 80Hz REAR L R THX 80Hz SUB L R MONO SUB XOVER THX 80Hz LFE OFF THX ULTRA2 SUB BGC N A ASA APART SUBWOOFERS L R MONO STEREO NONE THX REAR SPEAKERS THX 80Hz NONE ON OFF APART CLOSE TOGETHER SUB XOVER FULL 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz A 9 Appendix Lexicon MENU TREE continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES amp LEVELS DISTANCES OUTPUT LEVELS SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTO
39. SETUP TRIGGERS h TRIGGER SETUP TRIGGER SETUP MAIN MENU SETUP ale REMOTE ONLY ON 5 1 MONO SURR MODE ADJUST INPUTS selection of a trigger output connector DVD1 OFF 5 1 MONO OFF SPEAKERS Selecting a connector opens the TRIGGER AUDIO CONTROLS TRIGGER SETUP OFF Ermissre MUSIC SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG SETUP menu Shown at the far right The OFF EEs DISPLAYS parameters on the left side of the TRIGGER 21522808988 12 1 1E OFF mE MUSIC SETUP menu are identical regardless of the TRIGGER 2AE REMOTE ae VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS Cities 2 CHAN LOCK OPTIONS selected connector The TRIGGER SETUP OFF 5 1a 5 FILM indi OFF latz MUSIC LIVE CALIBRATION menu indicates factory default parameter OFF 5 5 1a EZ SurEX 5 1a TEX MUSIC 5 1 STANDARD ZONE2 INPUTS OFF 5 1a 2 CHANNEL RECORD INPUTS OFF i z 5 1a BYPASS LIVE CALIBRATION A 2CH BYPASS CAUTION LIVE SMALL HIGH AUDIO LEVELS MUSIC SURR ek INPUT SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG VOLUME CONTROL SETUP Heppe LIVE LARGE DIT 8 STEREO INPUTS MAIN POWER ON continued on page A 14 OFF OR MUTE LEVEL LX PLilx MUS 00 PLII 195 OFF 5 STEREO amp 5 1 ZONE PWR ON Do PLII MOVIE OFF REC PWR ON LOCK OPTIONS D0 Music OFF MAX VOLUME 12dB ae OO PL OFF MODES UNLOCKED Saree id AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED mm UE LAST LVL 80 to 12dB
40. Settings SUB LEVEL 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 23 Mode Adjust Lexicon Er s DECODING The DTS and DTS ES listening modes are designed for at a minimum playback of 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES and 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES sources DTS and DTS ES listening mode names differ depending on the encoding present in the input source the DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup DTS ES listening modes are available when DTS ES decoding is activated The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior of DTS ES decoding when it is activated e DTS ES decoding is activated when both the side and rear speakers are present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO a 5 1 channel matrix encoded or a 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES source is detected e DTS ES decoding is deactivated when the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to AUTO and a 5 1 channel DTS source is detected Note The table below is not applicable to the DTS ES THX DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX MUSIC listening modes Input Source 5 1 Channel 6 1 Channel Parameter Setting Matrix Encoded DTS ES Discrete Encoded DTS ES ES DECODING AUTO DTS DTS ES DTS ES ES DECODING ON
41. Surround EX encoding This listening mode can also be used with other types of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources with mixed results The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior of the Dolby Digital EX mode when activated The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated Matrix decoding is then applied to derive a surround back channel from the other surround channels e Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated when the DECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected e Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not activated when the EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected Note The MC 12 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital input sources because they do not include information in the input signal that identifies Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding The Dolby DIGITAL listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not activated Input Source Parameter Setting 5 1 Channel Dolby Digital 5 1 Channel Surround EX 5 1 Channel Surround EX Fla
42. TUNER AUX ZONE2 INPUTS RECORD INPUTS wi FILM m TV tz MUSIC tz MUSIC SURR PLIIx THX PLIIx MOV PLIIx MUS PLII THX PLII MOVIE PLII MUSIC PL EX PRO LOGIC THX KErmesss CIN MUSIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA HHHHHHHH 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO 5 1 4i FILM 5 1 i TV 5 1 i MUSIC THX THX MUSIC 5 1 PLIIx MOV 5 1 PLIIx MUS DIGITAL EX 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 Ermss r5 FILM Ermss r MUSIC Ermss THX frees THX MUSIC Eres 2 CHAN 5 1a i FILM 5 1a fi MUSIC 5 1a IHX SurEX 5 1a E MUSIC 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 5 1a BYPASS 2CH BYPASS LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE A 22 Numerics 2 0 ENCODING parameter 2 25 2CH status menu 2 21 2CH button 2 17 2CH BYPASS status menu 2 23 2CH BYPASS listening mode 5 33 2 CH parameter 3 12 3 13 5 3 A 20 2 CH SURROUND listening mode 5 15 2 CHANNEL listening mode 5 15 5 SPKR ENHANCE parameter 5 5 5 6 5 16 5 17 5 25 5 28 5 29 5 37 21 5 STEREO amp 5 1 option 3 60 5 1 2 CHANNEL listening mode 5 22 5 1 ANALOG STATUS menu 2 22 5 1 L7 FILM listening mode 2 18 5 4 5 16 5 1 L7 MUSIC listening mode 5 4 5 17 5 1 L7 TV listening mode 5 4 5 17 5 1 MONO listening mode 5 23 5 1 MONO LOGIC listening mode 5 23 5 1 MONO SURR listening mode 5 23 5 1a 2 CHANNEL listening mode 5 32 5 1
43. When ON is selected the command bank indicator appears in the top right corner of the on screen display whenever the MC 12 receives a remote control command When OFF is selected the command bank indicator does not appear on the on screen display when the MC 12 receives a remote control command Letter Indicator Command Bank None Main Zone Z Zone 2 R Record Zone S Shift No letter appears when the MC 12 receives a command from the Main Zone com mand bank even if the REMOTE STATE parameter is set to ON 3 64 12 Setup FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu to customize the front panel display MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS DISPLAY SETUP ON SCREEN DISPLAY FRONT PANEL DISPLAY AN SYNC DELAY CUSTOM NAME EDIT CUSTOM NAME TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings STATUS ALWAYS ON ALWAYS ON 2 SECONDS ALWAYS OFF BRIGHTNESS 100 100 75 50 25 STATUS ALWAYS ON 2 SECONDS ALWAYS OFF Controls the activation of the front panel display When ALWAYS ON is selected the front panel display remains activated at all times When 2 SECONDS is selected the front panel display activates for two seconds whenever a new input source is present or a new command is received When ALWAYS OFF is selected the front panel display re
44. Zone activates When a value is selected the MC 12 automatically sets Main Zone volume LAST LVL 80 to 12dB level to the selected value when the Main Zone is activated When LAST LVL is selected the MC 12 sets Main Zone volume level to the last volume level that was selected in the Main Zone during the previous operating session MUTE LEVEL 10dB 20dB 30dB 40dB FULL MUTE Determines the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main Zone when the Mute button is pressed When a value is selected Main Zone volume level is attenuated to the selected value when the Mute button is pressed When FULL MUTE is selected Main Zone volume level is fully attenuated when the Mute button is pressed ZONE PWR ON Selects the volume level at which Zone 2 activates When a value is selected the MC 12 automatically sets Zone 2 volume level to the selected value when Zone 2 is activated When LAST LVL is selected the MC 12 sets Zone 2 volume level to the last volume level that was selected in Zone 2 during the previous operating session LAST LVL 80 to 12dB REC PWR ON Selects the volume level at which the Record Zone activates When a value is selected the MC 12 automatically sets Record Zone volume level to the selected value when the Record Zone is activated When LAST LVL is selected the MC 12 sets Record Zone LAST LVL 80 to 12dB 3 66 12 Setup volume level to the last volume level that was selected in t
45. a cart is used use caution when moving the cart appartus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as when a power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the appara tus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped e Refer to the manufacturer s operating instruc tions for power requirements Be advised that different operating voltages may require the use of different line cord and or attachment plug Do not install the unit in an unventilated rack or directly above heat producing equipment such as power amplifiers Observe the maxi alerts you to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage inside the enclosure voltage that may be sufficient to constitute a risk of shock RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN mum ambient operating temperature listed in the product specification Never attach audio power amplifier outputs directly to any of the unit s connectors This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installati
46. are available Two connectors labeled Aux L R are provided for future expansion 6 ZONE 2 AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide analog audio output in Zone 2 Two stereo connectors labeled Audio L R are available The connector labeled Fix passes audio at fixed output levels The connector labeled Var passes audio at variable output levels and includes a built in volume control 2 7 Basic Operation Lexicon REAR PANEL OVERVIEW continued The MC 12 is shown on page 2 4 The MC 12 Balanced shown below includes balanced audio connectors for the Main Zone and Zone 2 Otherwise both models are identical wW CDL O C E DURS INPUT 1 eura COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT 3 MAIN OUTPUTS RECORD OUTPUTS 0 0 0 O 0 0 O 0 0 INPUT 4 OUTPUT FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SIDE REAR Fix ZONE 2 Var 606000 o 0 0 MAIN AUDIO OUTPUTS MICROPHONE INPUTS e e TRIGGER OUTPUTS t t 11414 12 1 00000000 L FRONT R CENTER L SUBWOOFER R MAIN AUDIO OUTPUTS 4 D Caution Never make or break connections to the MC 12 unless the MC 12 and all associated components are powered off 2 8 12 Basic Operation 7 RECORD ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide analog and digital audio output in the Record Zone Two stereo connectors labeled Audio L R are available for analog audio output The connector labele
47. balanced audio output connectors 2 9 BASS CONTENT parameter 5 12 5 37 BASS ENHANCE parameter 5 5 5 6 5 16 5 17 5 25 5 28 5 29 5 37 55 4 2 4 3 22 frequency response graph 4 3 settings 4 5 BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu 3 52 3 57 A 21 BASS RT parameter 5 12 5 37 BASS XOVER parameter 5 37 battery installation remote control 1 6 BGC parameter 3 26 3 32 BIT RATE parameter 2 22 2 25 BLUE button See remote control 2 16 boundary gain compensation 3 32 BRIGHTNESS parameter 3 65 A 22 C CAL NOISE parameter 3 57 3 58 21 Calibration automatic 3 35 manual 3 52 output levels 3 33 speaker distances 3 33 CALIBRATION parameter 5 12 5 37 CATHEDRAL listening mode 5 12 CENTER DEPTH parameter 5 10 5 11 5 38 CENTER L R parameter 3 28 CENTER MIX LVL parameter 2 25 CENTER MIX parameter 5 22 5 28 5 32 5 34 5 38 Index Lexicon C continued CENTER parameter 3 26 3 28 3 34 5 35 5 38 changing input names 3 5 CHANNELS parameter 2 25 CHECK MICROPHONES option 3 35 3 39 CHURCH listening mode 5 12 CNTR DLY SAMPLES parameter 5 22 5 28 5 32 5 38 COMPONENT IN menu 3 11 COMPONENT IN parameter 3 7 COMPONENT OSD parameter 3 15 3 18 A 20 COMPRESSION parameter 5 16 5 17 5 19 5 20 5 22 5 38 CONCERT HALL listening mode 5 11 crossover points determining 3 22 3 24 3 28 3 30 CROSSOVER SETUP menu 3 25 CTR WIDTH parameter 5 8 5 38
48. before automatic calibration is available and also the reason the previous check failed If this occurs go back to Connecting the Microphones on page 3 36 and work your way forward to this page The following AUTO SPEAKER SETUP messages display on screen before automatic calibration begins signals become too loud press the SETUP menu gt AUTO SPEAKER SETUP LEVELS TEST WILL BEGIN IN 10 PRESS gt TO SKIP COUNTDOWN MICCHECKREQUIRED FOR AUTO CALIBRATION NO MICROPHONE DETECTED e The CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message indicates that the MC 12 generates loud calibration noise signals during automatic calibration If the arrow button to cancel automatic calibration Press the arrow button to open the next AUTO SPEAKER The countdown display notifies you that automatic calibration will begin in 10 seconds The primary reason for the 10 second delay is to give you time to leave the listening space before automatic calibration begins If you choose to remain in the room your movements could affect the calibration results If you leave the room you can return in about 10 minutes the calibration procedure should be completed Press the arrow button to skip the countdown and begin automatic calibration The MC 12 automatically activates automatic calibration when the countdown ends 3 47 S etup Lexicon PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION continued SETTING DISTANCES FRONT LEFT
49. cavo con spine differenti Non installare l unit in un rack poco ventilato o direttamente sopra apparecchia ture che producono calore come amplificatori di potenza Controllare la massima temperatura ambientale di esercizio sulle specifiche tecniche del prodotto Fori ed aperture nei pannelli sono necessari per garantire un corretta ventilazione e prevenire surriscaldamenti Queste aperture non devono essere coperte o ostruite Non inserire oggetti di alcun tipo nei fori di ventilazione Evitare il contatto con liq uidi di qualsiasi genere Evitare di collegare le uscite di un amplificatore di potenza direttamente a qualsiasi connettore dell unit Per evitare il rischio di scosse elettriche non esporre il prodotto a pioggia o umid it Evitare l uso dove possa essere esposto all acqua Non tentare di utilizzare il prodotto se caduto se stato a contatto con liquidi o mostra chiari segni di danneggiamento o cambio di prestazioni che indicano la necessit di assistenza tecnica Ogni intervento sull unit va eseguito esclusivamente da personale qualificato La rimozione della copertura comporta l esposizione al pericolo di folgorazione Il presente triangolo impresso sul componente avverte la presenza di ten sioni pericolose non isolate all interno della copertura tali tensioni rappre sentano un pericolo di folgorazione senza nella documentazione allegata di importanti istruzioni relative al funzi onamento ed alla ma
50. command bank is activated pressing the remote control THX button while a 5 1 channel analog source is present activates the 5 1a THX 2 5 1a THX SurEX or 5 1a THX listening mode Subsequent presses toggle the SURROUND EX parameter between the ON and OFF settings SURROUND MIX Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to the audio output connectors labeled Front L R It is recommended that you set this parameter to 2dB or for all input sources Available in 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN and 5 1a 2 CHANNEL modes 5 to 5dB 5 44 12 Mode Adjust TREB CUT RT 500Hz to 20kHz Sets the frequency above which high frequencies are rolled off in the reverberated signal causing reverberated signals to grow progressively darker This results in a more natural sound because it simulates the effect of air absorption in a real hall Setting this parameter to a low frequency dampens the audio as it recirculates MODE PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS The following table lists each parameter and the modes in which it is used and consequently can actually shorten the reverb time Available in all LIVE modes VOCAL ENHANCE 6 0 3 0dB 0 0dB Controls the level of dialog boost in the audio output connector labeled Center Increase this setting to improve dialog intelligibility particularly at lower volume levels Available in all Logic 7 modes The parameter Is used in these
51. digital and analog audio input connectors are assigned Use the AUTO setting for components such as DVD SACD players that generate both digital and analog output signals Setup Lexicon CONFIGURING ADVANCED ZONE SETTINGS continued S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON OFF COMPONENT OSD ON OFF DO Controls the on screen display aspect ratio when the display device is connected to a Main Zone S Video output connector Aspect ratio refers to the size of the picture or the display device screen A 4 3 aspect ratio is almost square A 16 9 aspect ratio often referred to as widescreen is almost twice as wide as it is high When ON the on screen display appears in a 4 3 aspect ratio regardless of the incoming video input signal When OFF the on screen display appears in the same aspect ratio as the incoming video input signal The on screen display appears horizontally stretched across the display device screen when all of the following conditions are present e The S VIDEO OSD 4 3 parameter is OFF e An anamorphic video input signal is present e A 16 9 display device widescreen is connected to an S video output connector EX e 9 Controls the appearance of the on screen display when the display device is connected to the component video output connector When ON the display device shows the on screen display as a 480i video signal on a full blue screen background To minimize vie
52. e Calibrates individual speaker output levels within 0 54 of each other and overall speaker output DISTANCES e Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances desired values position and the speaker e Provides a comparison between original and calibrated speaker distances allowing selection of the e Calibrates speaker distances within 0 5 foot 2m of the physical distance between the primary listening LEVELS e Activates automatic calibration of output levels values levels within 3 0dB of THX reference levels 75dB e Provides a comparison between original and calibrated output levels allowing selection of the desired e Calibrates individual speaker output levels within 0 54 of each other and overall speaker output 3 35 Setup Lexicon CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES CAUTION MC 12 Rear Panel e The microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit peri LFE MAIN AUDIU require careful handling Dropping or otherwise physically abusing the microphones might cause errors during use or irreparable damage to the microphone The microphone wires also require careful handling Do not sharply bend the wires or place objects on them Never make or break microphone input connections unless the MC 12 is powered off with the rear panel power switch OR standby mode is activated with the front panel or remote control standby button Note the following Automatic calibration requires th
53. input of IR signals from infrared distribution equipment One 3 5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug Tip Ring Sleeve connection or mono plug Tip Sleeve connection is available 15 MICROPHONE INPUT CONNECTORS Provide microphone input for speaker distance and output level calibration Additionally inputs 1 left and 2 right are used when LIVE is active Four 3 5mm Tip Ring Sleeve connectors are available 16 REMOVABLE ACCESS PANEL Accommodates connectors for emerging technologies REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW The MC 12 remote control provides full operation of the MC 12 including commands such as menu navigation that are not available from the front panel The command matrix beginning on page 2 14 indicates the commands remote control buttons perform when each command bank is active The numbered items in the matrix corre spond with the remote control illustrations OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS The following factors can improve or impede remote control operation Note the following before operating the MC 12 remote control The remote control must be in line of sight with the front panel IR receiver Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the IR receiver The remote control may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light shines on the IR receiver e For optimal performance position the remote control at a 30 degree angle no more than 17 feet 5m from the MC 12 Placing the MC 12 inside a s
54. menu 3 6 3 7 restoring factory default settings 6 4 REVERB LVL parameter 5 42 ROLLOFF parameter 5 11 5 42 routine maintenance 6 3 RS 232 connectors 2 9 S S VIDEO 16 9 parameter 3 15 S VIDEO OSD 4 3 parameter 3 15 safety instructions ii v SAMPLE RATE parameter 2 21 2 22 2 24 2 26 SET DISTANCES display 3 50 SET LEVELS display 3 50 SETTING DISTANCES screen 3 48 SETTING LEVELS screen 3 48 SETUP menu 2 12 3 2 SETUP parameter 3 70 SHAPE parameter 5 42 SIDE L R parameter 3 26 3 28 5 35 5 42 SIDE LEFT parameter 3 34 SIDE RIGHT parameter 3 34 SIZE parameter 5 10 5 11 5 42 SOUND STAGE parameter 5 5 5 6 5 43 SOURCE parameter 5 13 5 43 SPEAKER ANGLE parameter 5 13 5 43 speaker calibration parameters 3 33 SPEAKER SETUP menu 3 2 SPEECH DETECT parameter 5 10 5 11 5 43 SPREAD parameter 5 43 standby button 2 3 STAT button 2 17 STATUS menu descriptions 2 21 STATUS menu Level Meters 2 26 STATUS menu parameters 2 25 STATUS parameter 3 63 3 65 SUB L R LVL parameter 5 32 SUB L R parameter 3 26 SUB LEVEL parameter 5 15 5 16 5 22 5 23 5 28 5 43 SUB parameter 5 35 SUB RIGHT parameter 3 34 SUB XOVER parameter 3 26 3 28 3 30 SUBWOOFER parameter 3 30 SUBWOOFERS L R parameter 3 28 SURR MIX LVL parameter 2 26 SURR ROLLOFF parameter 5 5 5 6 5 12 5 15 5 23 5 43 SURROUND DLY parameter 5 8 5 44 SURROUND EX parameter 5 19 5 30 5 44 SU
55. mode downmixes 5 1 channel analog input signals into 2 channel Logic 7 encoded output signals It sends these signals to the front speakers and the subwoofer It is recommended for recording purposes particularly for recording from a DVD A or multi channel SACD player to a CD R or another 2 channel recording format Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER MIX 0dB 25 to 5dB SURROUND MIX 0dB 5 to 5dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES 0 127 to 127 MASTER LEVEL 0dB 5 to 5dB LFE MIX 0 0dB 20 0 to 0 0dB SUB L R LVL 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 1a BYPASS MODE ADJUST 5 1 BYPASS e Designed for playback of 5 1 channel analog sources such as DVD A or SACD players Sends the 5 1 channel analog audio input connector directly to the Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors as shown on page 2 6 and page 3 59 These signals receive no internal processing e When both side and rear speakers are present surround channel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers To configure a 5 channel speaker setup set the OUTPUT LEVELS menu SIDE L R or REAR L R parameter to OFF to deacti vate the associated surround speakers The 5 1a BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated whenever the 5 1 channel analog audio input connector is assigned to the
56. modes 5 SPKR ENHANCE All L7 modes ACADEMY FILTER MONO LOGIC and 5 1 MONO LOGIC AUTO AZIMUTH L7 FILM and L7 TV BASS CONTENT PANORAMA BASS ENHANCE All L7 modes BASS RT CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes BASS XOVER All LIVE modes CALIBRATION PANORAMA CENTER All except 2 CH modes 2 CHANNEL 2 CH BYPASS DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1a 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 MONO and LIVE modes 5 45 Mode Adjust Lexicon The parameter Is used in these modes CENTER DEPTH NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL CENTER MIX 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL CNTR DLY SAMPLES 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL COMPRESSION All Dolby Digital modes CTR WIDTH DPLII MUSIC and DPLIIx MUSIC CUSTOM All modes CUSTOM VS PRESET All modes DIFFUSION All LIVE modes DIMENSION DPLII MUSIC and DPLIIx MUSIC EARLY RFLX LVL All LIVE modes EFFECT LVL NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA MONO LOGIC and 5 1 MONO LOGIC ES DECODING All DTS modes EX DECODING 5 1 PLIIx MOV 5 1 PLIIx MUS DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL FRONT STEERING L7 TV L7 MUSIC L7 MUSIC SURR all 5 1 L7 modes all DTS L7 modes and all 5 1a L7 modes INPUT BALANCE PANORAMA LFE All Dolby Digital DTS and 5 1a modes LFE MIX All Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 M
57. parameter controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center LFE and Subwoofer L R 4 5 Audio Controls Lexicon LOUDNESS ON OFF m mg Controls the amount of low frequency boost that is automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center LFE and Subwoofer L R When ON is selected loudness compensation is automatically applied based on volume level As volume level increases the amount of low frequency boost automatically decreases The loudness contour is optimized for input sources calibrated to THX reference levels When OFF is selected no loudness compensation is applied The graph shown at the right indicates the frequency response that is automatically applied when the LOUDNESS parameter is set to ON and Main Zone volume level is adjusted To control the loudness from the remote control Press the Shift button e Press the TV button to turn the LOUDNESS to on e Press the SAT button to turn the LOUDNESS off LOUDNESS dB 5k 10k The LOUDNESS parameter controls the amount of low frequency boost that is automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center LFE and Subwoofer L R 12 Audio Controls BALANCE 8 Controls the left to right balance of the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R L lt lt l gt gt R To control the bala
58. proper microphone placement during LIVE calibration and also for permanent location Subwoofer Front Right 3 72 12 Setup RO P E R microphone positioning for LIVE When positioning the microphones do not X Place the microphones on the front or rear walls X Place the microphones near the floor or ceiling X Obstruct the microphones with furniture or other fixtures X Place the microphones within 2 feet 0 61m of any speaker The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement for LIVE calibration or for a permanent location Center Microphone Subwoofer Front Right Setup Lexicon PERFORMING LIVE CALIBRATION MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS LIVE CALIRATION CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION SIT QUIETLY PRESS TO BEGIN COUNTDOWN Select SETUP LIVE CALIBRATION as shown above The ICAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message indicates that the MC 12 generates loud calibration noise signals during LIVE calibration If the signals become too loud press the arrow button to cancel LIVE calibration Press the arrow button to begin calibration The countdown display notifies you that LIVE calibration begins in 10 seconds The prima
59. seTUP Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector labeled CENTER when a custom speaker setup is selected Opens the CENTER SPEAKER menu to select a crossover point for the CENTER output connector e Select FULL to send a full range signal to the center speaker Otherwise select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the center speaker e Select FULL SUB to send a full range signal to the center speaker and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB L R outputs The set crossover point of the SUB L R parameter determines the upper range of duplicate bass Selecting the FULL SUB option can result in excessive bass e Select NONE when the speaker setup does not include a center speaker The MC 12 then redirects center channel signals to the Front L R output connectors unless the 5 1a BYPASS listening mode is activated In this case configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD A SACD player to redirect center channel signals gt ERE When a THX speaker setup is selected a THX 80Hz crossover point is applied to the Center output connector and the CENTER parameter cannot be adjusted SIDE L R FULL FULL SUB 30Hz to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE EX REIN SET caossovers EIE LR Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector labeled SIDE L R when a custom speaker setup is selected Opens the SIDE L R SPEAKERS menu to select a crosso
60. selected input The 5 1a BYPASS listening mode is only available for 5 1 channel analog sources e Pressing the remote control SHIFT then 2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter between ON and OFF Option Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions Note Speaker crossover settings speaker distances and audio controls tone are not available when the 5 1a BYPASS listening mode is activated 5 32 12 Mode Adjust 2CH BYPASS This listening mode sends 2 channel analog audio input signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R with no internal processing The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated whenever a 2 channel analog source is present and the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is not available when a digital source is present and the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO Pressing the remote control SHIFT then 2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter between ON and OFF Note Speaker crossover settings speaker distances and audio controls tone are not available when the 2CH BYPASS listening mode is activated LIVE SMALL LIVE MED amp LIVE LARGE DIETE o DII LIVE Lexicon Intellige
61. selection button When the Main Zone is deactivated pressing a Main Zone input selection button activates the Main Zone and selects the corresponding input Zone 2 and the Record Zone remain deactivated until a Zone 2 or Record Zone input is selected 8 MAIN ZONE OFF BUTTON Deactivates the Main Zone 9 ZONE 2 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS Selects the input in Zone 2 When an input is selected an amber LED lights on the corresponding input selection button When Zone 2 is deactivated pressing a Zone 2 input selection button activates Zone 2 and selects the corresponding input The Main and Record Zones remain deactivated until a Main or Record Zone input is selected 10 ZONE 2 OFF BUTTON Deactivates Zone 2 11 RECORD ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS Selects the input in the Record Zone When an input is selected a red LED lights on the corresponding input selection button When the Record Zone is deactivated pressing a Record Zone input selection button activates the Record Zone and selects the corre sponding input The Main Zone and Zone 2 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or Zone 2 input is selected 12 RECORD ZONE OFF BUTTON Deactivates the Record Zone 2 5 Basic Operation Lexicon REAR PANEL OVERVIEW The MC 12 is shown below The MC 12 Balanced shown on page 2 8 includes balanced audio connectors for the Main Zone and Zone 2 Otherwise both models are identical The numbers in the rear panel illustrations co
62. settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32 to 640 kbps Possible settings for DTS ES sources range from 754 to 1509 7kbps 32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509 7kbps CENTER MIX LVL Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used during the mixing process 3 0dB 4 5dB 6 0dB CHANNELS Indicates the number of channels present in the input source The first digit indicates the number of front channels present The digit after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE low frequency effects information For example if the CHANNELS parameter is set to 3 2 1 and LFEZON LFE information the 1 channel is sent to the LFE output If the CHANNELS parameter is set to 3 2 1 and LFE OFF LFE information is sent to the subwoofer output s and or speakers depending on crossover settings 3 3 1 3 2 1 3 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 0 1 0 Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3 2 1 3 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 0 and 1 0 Current settings for DTS ES input sources include 3 3 1 and 3 2 1 DIALOG OFFSET Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below full scale 27dBFS When the dialog normalization value of the incoming signal is higher or lower the DIALOG OFFSET parameter indicates the amount of adjustment the MC 12 makes to normalize dialog to
63. space and the components i e speakers subwoofers and power amplifiers internal noise level of the microphones PLEASE WAIT to a reasonable level before performing automatic calibration After eliminating microphones that are When the procedure is finished the MC 12 automatically reverts to the last volume level that was selected before automatic calibration began not detected or not functioning the MC 12 calculates an aver age level for all microphones e During automatic calibration you should refer to the on screen CHECKING MICROPHONES display instead of the front panel display as additional informa tion and instructions are available on the on screen display Appears in the on screen display while CHECK MICROPHONES the MC 12 confirms the microphone CHECKING MICROPHONES level calculated during the silence 1 Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES check To do this the MC 12 sends PLEASE WAIT option as shown above alternating calibration noise signals to 2 The first CHECK MICROPHONES screen opens in the on screen the front left and right speakers These signals are output display indicating the importance of proper microphone between 55 and 95dB beginning with 55dB and increasing in placement to achieve accurate automatic calibration results 5dB increments until the microphones detect the required 3 39 Lexicon Setup CHECKING THE MICROPHONES continued level If the signal becomes too loud press the
64. the amplifier is on Run a Microphone Check to determine if a microphone has been damaged See page 3 39 for instructions on checking the microphones 3 74 4 Audio Controls PUG Controls soe EVA UPS Pu 4 2 Audio Controls Lexicon AUDIO CONTROLS Selecting the MAIN MENU AUDIO CONTROLS option Zone audio output connectors MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP AUDIO CONTROLS BASS 0 0dB TREBLE 0 0 TILT EQ 0 0 LOUDNESS OFF lt I gt BALANCE FADER BASS TREBLE TILT EQ LOUDNESS BALANCE and FADER parameters affect the Main Zone audio output connectors This includes all Main Zone inputs and listening modes except the 5 1a BYPASS and 2CH BYPASS listening modes e The ZONE2 BALANCE parameter affects the Zone 2 audio output connectors including all Zone 2 inputs REC BALANCE parameter affects the Record Zone audio output connectors including all Record Zone inputs opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu to customize the Main Zone Zone 2 and Record EBENE Be EM NDA 1 ee TEN ee Y Y 3 0 to 3 0dB 6 0 to 6 0dB lt Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings BASS 0 0dB 6 0 to 6 0dB TREBLE 0 0 6 0 to 6 0dB TILT EQ 0 0 3 0 to 3 0dB LOU
65. the current amount of input level adjustment for the selected 2 channel and 5 1 channel when the MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF analog audio input connector This parameter cannot be directly adjusted When the ANLG IN LVL menu AUTO parameter is ON the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the amount of automatic input level adjustment When AUTO GAIN is set to ON DVD1 ANLG IN LVL AUTO The AUTO parameter MANUAL is reflected by the AUTOGAIN value AUTOGAIN E When the AUTO parameter is OFF the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the amount of input level adjustment as set by the MANUAL parameter When AUTO GAIN is set to OFF DVD1 ANLG IN LVL AUTO The MANUAL parameter _ is reflected by the AUTOGAIN value AUTO GAIN When the AUTO parameter is ON the AUTO GAIN parameter continues to indicate the amount of manual input level adjustment until automatic adjustments have been made LEVEL METERS Indicate fluctuating input levels in the front left L and front right R channels for the selected input Meters are also present for center C side left SL side right SR and sub LFE when the input is set up for 5 1 analog Like the STATUS menu level meters ANLG IN LVL menu level meters indicate input levels for both analog and digital audio sources However ANLG IN LVL menu input level adjustments only affect 2 channel or 5 1 channel sources when the MAIN ADVANCED gt ANALOG BYPA
66. the microphone check The microphones are scattered throughout the listening space rather than positioned as close together as possible in a location that is equidistant from the front left and right speakers Microphone Center Subwoofer Front Right 3 38 12 Setup CHECKING THE MICROPHONES MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST SETUP SPEAKER SETUP CHECK MICROPHONES INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS GROUP MICROPHONES SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES INTO A BUNDLE IN THE REAR PANEL CONFIG AUTOMATIC MIDDLE OF THE ROOM DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS PRESS TO BEGIN TRIGGERS SET CROSSOVERS MIC CHECK LOCK OPTIONS BEFORE CALIBRATING LIVE CALIBRATION AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP Note the following 3 Press the arrow button to begin the microphone check The following screens appear in the on screen display as the micro MC 12 outputs calibration noise signals between 55 and phone check is performed 95dB beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments until the microphones detect the required level If the calibra tion noise signal becomes too loud press the arrow button CHECKING FOR SILENCE to cancel the microphone check Appears in the on screen display while CHECK MICROPHONES e Although the calibration noise signal is output at a fixed the MC 12 determines the relative noise CHECKING FOR SILENCE _ volume level you should set all volume controls for associated level of the listening
67. to emphasize the rich smooth reverberant decay characteristic of large listening spaces with long reverber ation time relative to their size such as cathedrals The CATHEDRAL mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from Lexicon professional products Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER DEPTH 12 0 to 18 SPEECH DETECT ON ON OFF SIZE 30m 4 to 30m MID RT 3 725 24ms to 24 35 BASS RT 4 47s 5ms to 48 6s PRE DELAY 23ms OFF 1 to 100ms ROLLOFF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF EFFECT LVL 8dB 12 to OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 BASS RT MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent meaning that the full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions PANORAMA Lm emm The PANORAMA mode is designed for playback of stereo and matrix encoded sources PANORAMA uses proprietary Lexicon algorithms to move the stereo image outward from the front speakers producing a wider stereo field with greater depth Sound quality depends on proper location of the listening position and front speakers When the front speakers are positioned close to either side of the display device the effect is produced over a wider area than when the front speakers are positio
68. to optimize ambient and direc tional surround sounds Applied to music sources ASA processing places surround channel signals on a wide stable rear soundstage ON OFF ASA processing is not available unless e One of the THX ULTRA2 listening modes is activated e Both side and rear speakers are present The ASA parameter can be changed in any mode but the change will have no effect unless the above conditions are met To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing configure a 7 1 channel speaker setup so the rear speakers are placed close together facing the center of the listening space e Select APART if the distance between the rear speakers is greater than 4 feet 1 2m e Select CLOSE if the distance between the rear speakers is greater than 1 foot 0 3m but less than 4 feet 1 2m e Select TOGETHER if the distance between the rear speakers is less than 1 foot 0 3m You can use the remote control 7 5 button to toggle between 7 and 5 channel playback When you use the 7 5 button the MC 12 automatically e Activates ASA processing during 7 channel playback e Deactivates ASA processing during 5 channel playback e Switches between the 5 1 THX ULTRA2 and THX DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX or 5 1a THX ULTRA2 and 5 1a THX listening modes 3 32 12 CALIBRATING SPEAKER DISTANCES amp OUTPUT LEVELS The MC 12 offers both automatic and manual calibration of speaker distances and output le
69. ttes for regn eller fugt og ikke bruges i n rheden af vand for at undg risiko for elektrisk stod og brand Apparatet aldrig bruges hvis det er blevet stodt beskadiget eller v dt eller hvis ndringer i ydelsen tyder at det tr nger til eftersyn Dette apparat ma kun bnes af fagfolk Hvis daekslet tages af uds ttes man for livsfarlig hojspeending Denne m rkat komponenten advarer om uisoleret farlig sp nding i AN apparatet h j nok til at give elektrisk st d Denne m rkat p komponenten advarer om vigtig driftsog vedligeholdsin N formation i den tilh rende litteratur SUOMI TARKEITA TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA S ilyt ohjeet tulevaa k ytt varten Seuraa kaikkia yksikk n merkittyj ohjeita ja varoituksia K yt aina oikeaa verkkoj nnitett Tehovaatimukset selvi v t valmistajan k ytt o hjeista Huomaa ett eri k ytt j nnitteet saattavat vaatia toisenlaisen verkkojo hdon ja tai pistokkeen k yt n l asenna yksikk telineeseen jossa ei ole tuuletusta tai v litt m sti l mp tuo tavien laitteiden esim tehovahvistimien yl puolelle Ymp rist n l mp tila k yt ss ei saa ylitt tuotespesifikaation maksimil mp tilaa Kotelo on varustettu tuuletusreiill ja aukoilla Luotettavan toiminnan varmista miseksi ja ylil mpenemisen v ltt miseksi n it aukkoja ei saa sulkea tai peitt Mit n esineit ei saa ty nt tuuletusaukkoihin M
70. una tensi n peligrosa no aislada en el interior del equipo una tensi n que puede ser suficiente como para constituir un riesgo de descarga el ctrica Este triangulo que aparece en su equipo le alerta de instrucciones operati vas y de mantenimiento importantes en los documentos que acompa an el producto FRANCAIS INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANTES RELATIVES A LA S CURIT Conservez ces instructions pour pouvoir vous y r f rer ult rieurement Suivez toutes ces instructions et tenez compte de tous les avertissements indiqu s sur l appareil et dans la documentation fournie avec l appareil Utilisez toujours la tension secteur correcte Consultez les instructions du fabri cant pr cisant les caract ristiques d alimentation respecter Attention le type de cordon secteur et ou de prise secteur peut varier selon des tensions en vigueur dans l installation N installez pas l appareil dans un Rack mal ventil ou directement au dessus d un appareil d gageant de la chaleur comme un amplificateur de puissance Respectez la temp rature maximale de fonctionnement pr cis e dans les caract ristiques techniques Les ouvertures dans le boitier assurent la bonne ventilation de l appareil vitent toute surchauffe et assurent le bon fonctionnement du systeme Veillez ne pas obstruer couvrir ou ins rer d objets dans ces ouvertures Veillez ne pas ren verser de liquide sur l appareil Ne reliez jamais directement les sorties audio
71. 0 1 0 3dB Rack Mounting Optional brackets are available for installation in a stan dard 19 equipment rack 2 rack units required for MC 12 3 rack units required for MC 12 Balanced Component Video Performance Environment Operating Temperature 0 to 35 C 32 to 95 F Storage Temperature 30 to 75 C 22 to 167 F Relative Humidity 95 maximum without condensation Remote Control Hand held backlit infrared remote control unit Requires 2 AA batteries Alkaline batteries recommended Compatibility 3 channel Y Pr Pb format independent Switching Passive Impedence 750 Insertion Loss 3dB Bandwidth e gt 300MHz Specifications are subject to change without notice A 3 Appendix Lexicon DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Application of Council Directive s 89 336 EEC and 93 68 EEC Standard s to Which Conformity is Declared EN55022 1998 EN55024 1998 EN61000 3 2 2000 EN61000 3 3 2000 and EN60065 1998 Manufacturer Harman Specialty Group 3 Oak Park Bedford MA 01730 1413 USA The equipment identified here conforms to the Directive s and Standard s specified above Type of Equipment Digital Controller Model Lexicon MC 12 Date June 2001 Harman Specialty Group Vice President of Engineering 3 Oak Park Bedford MA 01730 1413 USA Tel 781 280 0300 Fax 781 280 0490 MC 12 Appendix MENU TREE Selecting
72. 2 Mode Adjust DOPLIIx EX amp DOPLII Tex TORTS Gerd o DT BENE The Dolby PLIIx THX and Dolby PLII THX listening modes are designed to playback 7 1 or 5 1 discrete channels decoded from 2 channel Dolby Surround encoded sources The seven or five main channels are full frequency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a limited frequency range of up to 120Hz The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front side and rear speakers are present Note The PLIIx mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration The modes are recommended for home theaters with THX certified speakers Dolby PLII x THX encoding e Apply THX re equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization e Apply THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels which results in smoother sound movements between them Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions DOPLIIx MOV amp DOPLII MOVIE 00057 8 e DIUI S T
73. 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors will mute e The 5 1a BYPASS listening mode is not activated Note the following e Adownmix of all channels is sent to Zone 2 e Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 and Record Zone audio output connectors For example when the listening mode is activated the Zone 2 and Record Zone audio output connectors will generate mono output signals e Set the ZONE2 IN and RECORD IN parameters to DMIX when using a playback device DVD player that does not have built in Dolby Digital or DTS ES decoding and the recording device is a VCR or Personal Video Recorder PVR MC 12 automatically downmixes multi channel sources except LOGIC 7 FILM and MUSIC sources to stereo output signals for listening and recording Also 5 1 channel analog sources can be downmixed when the MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF Upon playback these downmixes are compatible with matrix decoders but sound best through a Logic 7 listening mode Setup Lexicon CONFIGURING ADVANCED ZONE SETTINGS continued RECORD ADVANCED ANLG IN LVL 18 to 12dB EX c 9 Opens the RECORD ADV menu which configures advanced Record Zone input settings The parameters on the left side of the RECORD ADV menu are identical regardless of the selected input The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable The RECORD ADV menu shown in the Appen
74. 2dB NAME DVD1 ANLG IN LVL NT3 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 DIGITAL BYPASS ANALOG IN NONE DIG OUT RATE 44 1k1z ae ANLG IN LVL AUTO RECORD ENABLED 1 VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 11 COMPONENT IN 1 INPUT tz FILM 11 96kHz poo 5 1 7 FILM mss e FILM PER 5 1 5 1a K FILM i dus MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ae ana ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED 3 20 12 DIG OUT RATE INPUT 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz Exc c c recono anvancen KOJ our RATE Controls the sample rate of digital and analog input signals sent to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors When INPUT is selected the sample rate of input signals is not converted Therefore the original sample rate is maintained from the input connectors through to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors When a value is selected input signals pass through the selected value of sample rate conversion then pass to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors Set the DIG OUT RATE parameter to the appropriate value when using a recording format that operates on a single sample rate such as CD R format 44 1 2 RECORD BLOCKED ENABLED Prevents recording device feedback loops When BLOCKED is selected the MC 12 blocks the Record Zone audio output connectors to prevent feedback loops However video inpu
75. 2s 30ms to 20 2s PRE DELAY OFF OFF 1 to 100ms ROLLOFF 2 4kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF EFFECT LVL 2dB 12 to 6dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions CHURCH e E The CHURCH mode uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich smooth reverberant decay characteristic of small and medium listening spaces with long reverberation time relative to their size such as churches and chambers The CHURCH mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from Lexicon professional products Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER DEPTH 5 0 to 18 SPEECH DETECT ON ON OFF SIZE 20m 4 to 30m MID RT 1 56s 24ms to 24 3s BASS RT 1 87s 5ms to 48 6s PRE DELAY 24ms OFF 1 to 100ms ROLLOFF 2 4kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF EFFECT LVL 3dB 12 to 6dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 BASS RT MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent meaning that the full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 11 Mode Adjust Lexicon CATHEDRAL Lm emm The CATHEDRAL mode is similar to the CHURCH listening mode It uses a reverb algorithm
76. 3 69 Setup Lexicon LOCK OPTIONS Displays the LOCK OPTIONS menu which protects MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP menu branch parameter settings from accidental changes LOCK OPTIONS SETUP AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED MODES UNLOCKED MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCKED LOCK OPTIONS UNLOCKED lt LIVE CALIBRATION Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings MODES UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED SETUP UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED MODES LOCKED UNLOCKED serur O LocK options OA mones Protects MODE ADJUST menu branch settings from accidental changes When LOCKED is selected MODE ADJUST menu branch settings including all listening mode menu settings cannot be adjusted When UNLOCKED is selected all MODE ADJUST menu branch settings can be adjusted AUDIO CNTRL Protects AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings from accidental changes When LOCKED is selected AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings cannot be adjusted When UNLOCKED is selected AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings can be adjusted LOCKED UNLOCKED SETUP LOCKED UNLOCKED EX EX Protects SETUP menu branch settings from accidental changes When LOCKED is selected SETUP menu branch settings cannot be adjusted When UNLOCKED is selected SETUP menu branch settings c
77. 3 digital audio 8 analog audio 5 composite video 8 S video or 4 component video input connectors The analog audio input connectors can be configured for stereo or 5 1 channel sources Beyond the standard 5 1 channel audio output connectors the rear panel includes stereo rear and stereo subwoofer connectors as well as stereo auxiliary connectors to provide even more audio channels All Zone audio output connectors include 24 bit 96kHz D A converters operating in dual differential mode In addition the MC 12 Balanced includes balanced audio output connectors for all Main Zone and Zone 2 channels Inside and out the MC 12 is designed to remain viable in a future of emerging technologies Two RS 232 connectors are provided for serial control one to perform flash memory software upgrades and backup and restore configuration files and another to support future expansion Inside two expansion slots are available for hardware upgrades making it possible to more than quadruple the MC 12 s processing power More than just an audio and video control center the MC 12 features the latest version of Lexicon s critically acclaimed Logic 7 decoding which derives 7 1 channel output from stereo 5 1 and 6 1 channel sources Unlike other decoders Logic 7 is compatible with all input sources and requires no special encoding Because the improvement it provides is clearly audible Logic 7 decoding is widely regarded as the finest available
78. 30Hz 30Hz 30Hz 30Hz 50Hz 40Hz 40Hz 40Hz 40Hz 60Hz 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz 70Hz 60Hz 60Hz 60Hz 60Hz 80Hz 70Hz 70Hz 70Hz 70Hz THX 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 90Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz 100Hz 90Hz 90Hz 90Hz 90Hz 1108z 100 100Hz 100Hz 100Hz 120Hz 110Hz 110Hz 110Hz 110Hz 120Hz 120Hz 120Hz 120Hz NONE NONE NONE FRONT L R FULL FULL SUB 30Hz to 120Hz THX 80Hz Select FULL to send a full range signal to the front speakers Ex EGLI SET CROSSOVERS gt CUSTOM SETUP A FRONT LR Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled FRONT L R when a custom speaker setup is selected Opens the FRONT L R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the FRONT L R output connectors Otherwise select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the front speakers Select FULL SUB to send a full range signal to the front speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB L R outputs The set crossover point of the SUB L R parameter determines the upper range of duplicate bass Selecting the FULL SUB option can result in excessive bass 3 27 Lexicon SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS continued Baa EZ e ux serur 5 When a THX speaker setup is selected a THX 80Hz crossover point is applied to the FRONT L R output connectors and the FRONT L R parameter cannot be adjusted CENTER FULL FULL SUB 30Hz to 120Hz THX 80Hz EX SPEAKERS gt SET crossovers gt custom
79. 54 5 to 1509 7kbps SAMPLE RATE 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz ES ENCODING DISCRETE MATRIX OFF WORD LENGTH 16 bits 20 bits 24 bits SAMPLE RATE 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz The only possible sample rate for 5 1 analog sources is 96kHz as they are converted to 96kHz PCM at the MC 12 input when MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS is set to OFF See Status Menu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 25 for detailed information See Status Menu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 25 for detailed information LUIN PG1 dts PG1 INPUT WORD LENGTH MODE SAMPLE RATE CHANNELS BIT RATE 5 1 ANALOG STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE s ENCODING dB L C R SLSR dBL R SLSR 0 2 22 12 Basic Operation 5 1a BYPASS STATUS Provides information about 5 1 channel analog input sources when the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE 5 1a BYPASS INPUT TYPE BYPASS See Status Menu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 25 for detailed information 5 1a BYPASS STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE 2CH BYPASS STATUS Provides information about 2 channel analog input sources when the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE 2CH BYPASS INPUT TYPE BYPASS See Status Menu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 25 for detailed informat
80. A 8 S video and 4 component video 3 RCA and 1 BNC Video Outputs 4 composite RCA 2 monitor and 2 Record Zone 2 S video 2 monitor and 2 Record Zone and 1 component BNC Composite amp S video Performance Compatibility NTSC PAL and SECAM Switching Active Output Level 1 0V peak to peak Microphone Input Connectors Inputs 4 3 5 miniature phone jacks Input Sensitivity 10mVrms 400mV maximum input level Input Impedence 20kQ accepts balanced or unbalanced input signals Other Trigger Outputs 1 power on off and 1 programmable connector on detachable screw terminals 12 VDC 0 5 amps each RS 232 Serial Input Output 2 9 pin D sub connectors Power Requirements 90 250 VAC 50 60Hz 60W universal line input detach able power cord MC 12 Dimensions amp Weight Height with feet 5 2 inches 132mm Width 17 3 inches 440mm Depth 14 85 inches 377mm Weight 36lbs 16 4kg Impedance e 750 Input Return Loss gt 40dB Differential Gain 0 596 Differential Phase 0 5 Bandwidth gt 25MHz K Factor 0 396 Gain 0 15dB Signal to Noise Ratio gt 70dB MC 12 Balanced Dimensions amp Weight Height with feet 6 63 inches 169mm Width 17 3 inches 440mm Depth 14 85 inches 377mm Weight 45165 20 5kg Frequency Response e 10Hz to 10MHz
81. ALIBRATION DISPLAY SETUP ON SCREEN DISPLAY Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings STATUS 2 SECONDS ALWAYS ON 2 SEC ONDS ALWAYS OFF POSITION TOP TOP CENTER BOTTOM FORMAT NTSC SECAM PAL NTSC BACKGROUND ON ON OFF REMOTE STATE ON ON OFF STATUS ALWAYS ON 2 SECONDS ALWAYS OFF Controls the activation of the on screen display when the display device is connected to a Main Zone video output connector When ALWAYS ON is selected the on screen display remains activated at all times When 2 SECONDS is selected the on screen display activates FRONT PANEL DISPLAY A V SYNC DELAY EDIT CUSTOM NAME ON SCREEN DISPLAY ALWAYS ON STATUS 2 SECONDS Q 2 SECONDS POSITION ALWAYS OFF FORMAT BACKGROUND TOP REMOTE STATE CENTER BOTTOM SECAM PAL NTSC for two seconds whenever a new input source is present or a new command is received When ALWAYS OFF is selected the on screen display remains deactivated at all times and will not reactivate until the STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS Note When the ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF the on screen display immediately deactivates Press the OSD button or use the front panel display as a guide to reset the ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS POSITION TOP CENTER BOTTOM Controls the vertical alignment of the two line status on the display device
82. AMPLE RATE 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz See Status Menu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 25 for detailed information 2CH STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE STATUS Provides information about Dolby Digital input sources Features L C R SL SR and SUB level meters Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE The current listening mode CHANNELS 3 2 1 3 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 0 1 0 BIT RATE 32 to 640kbps EX ENCODING MATRIX NO SAMPLE RATE 48kHz 2 0 ENCODING MATRIX NONE DIALOG OFFSET 27 to 4dB MIX ROOM SMALL LARGE CENTER MIX LVL 3 0dB 4 5dB 6 0dB SURR MIX LVL 0 0 3 0dB 6 0dB See Status Menu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 25 for detailed information Oo D STATUS Oo 0 STATUS INPUT SAMPLE RATE MODE 2 0 ENCODING CHANNELS DIALOG OFFSET BIT RATE MIX ROOM EX ENCODING dBL C R SLSR CENTER MIX LVL SURR MIX LVL 2 21 Basic Operation Lexicon Em STATUS 5 1 ANALOG STATUS Provides information about DTS ES input sources Includes L C R Provides information about 5 1 channel analog sources Includes L SL SR SB and LFE level meters C R SL and LFE level meters Parameter Possible Settings Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input INPUT The current input MODE The current listening mode MODE The current listening mode CHANNELS 3 3 1 3 2 1 INPUT TYPE ANLG BIT RATE 7
83. ATIC CALIBRATION Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on the automatic calibration results Microphone placement determines next page to position the microphones for automatic calibration whether the MC 12 calibrates optimal speaker distances and output Select the microphone placement that best meets the needs of the levels for a single listening position several listening positions in a listening space single row or several listening positions in the listening space 3 41 Setup Lexicon POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION continued P RO P E R microphone placement to achieve the best results for a single listening position When calibrating for a single listening position place the microphones V As close together as possible in a single listening position the primary listening position V At the approximate spot where the listener s head will be during listening 4 Ina clear line of sight path with the speakers In a location unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals v At least 2 feet 0 61m from all speakers and walls but within 30 feet 9 14m of all speakers The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement when calibrating for a single listening position The microphones are positioned as close together as poss
84. B OFF BGC N A BGC N A ASA APART ASA APART Select ON if the subwoofer using the Main Zone audio output e Select OFF if the subwoofer using the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Subwoofer L R is THX Ultra2 certified connectors labeled Subwoofer L R is not THX Ultra2 certified When ON is selected the BGC parameter can be used to adjust When OFF is selected the BGC parameter is not available boundary gain compensation N A 3 31 Setup Lexicon BGC BOUNDARY GAIN COMPENSATION c BEI c ser crossovers 9 cusrom seru OT or sE rur CRIN EEE serur e Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to ON ON OFF e Select ON to apply a highpass 55Hz filter to all Main Zone audio output connectors and listening modes e Select OFF and no filtering is applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors and listening modes Note BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is caused by the proximity of the speakers to the listening room walls ASA ADVANCED SPEAKER ARRAY EG SPEAKERS crossovers O custom seru o ASA is a proprietary THX technology that processes rear channel signals to optimize the listening experience for THX Ultra2 listening modes including 5 1 THX ULTRA2 5 1 THX MUSIC DTS THX ULTRA2 DTS THX MUSIC 5 1a THX ULTRA2 or 5 1a THX MUSIC Applied to film sources ASA processing blends surround channel signals
85. CENTER SIDE L R REAR L R SUB L R MONO LOGIC EFFECT LVL 9dB ACADMY FILTER ON SURR ROLLOFF 0 OUTPUT LEVELS 3 1kHz CUSTOM regardless of which listening mode is selected However certain parameter ranges differ from listening mode to listening mode BASS CONTENT ACADEMY FILTER BASS ENHANCE CENTER DEPTH CNTR DLY SAMPLES COMPRESSION CUSTOM VS PRESET ON BINAURL OFF 30 to 12dB 127 to 127 PRESET AUTO OFF MONO CUSTOM ON STEREO OFF ON ON 0 to 18 AUTO FRONT AUTO OFF OFF ON NEUTRAL ON OFF REAR OFF ON 5ms to 48 6s 25 to 51 MIN 1 to 6 MAX 12 to 6dB OFF OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM CUSTOM CUSTOM VS PRESET RESET MODE ies DECODING A 17 Appendix Lexicon MENU TREE continued FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT RESTORE DEFAULTS FACTORY SETTINGS HAVE BEEN RESTORED PRESS ANY KEY TO RESTART Refer to the Status Menus section that begins on page 2 21 for more information 5 5 INPUT MODE CHANNELS BIT RATE ies ENCODING 1 C R SLSR 0 6 Hol oo 3085 ne 45 2CH STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE dits EIE 62 WORD LENGTH SAMPLE RATE 5 1 ANALOG STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE dB L C
86. D ADVANCED VCR INPUT SETUP NAME VCR DIGITAL IN NONE ANALOG IN ANALOG 4 ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 6 COMPONENT IN 5 1a 5 FILM LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG RECORD IN ANLG RECORD ADVANCED INPUT SETUP PVR GAME TAPE TUNER AUX CD INPUT SETUP NAME cD DIGITAL IN COAX 4 ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO COMPOSITE 1 COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH t5 MUSIC DOD 5 17 MUSIC ies 00 5 1a 5 1 rz FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED PVR INPUT SETUP NAME PVR DIGITALIN OPTICAL 3 ANALOG IN ANALOG 5 ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN _ S VIDEO 7 COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH t TV 5 1 tz TV LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED Selecting SETUP INPUTS prompts the selection of the desired input for example DVD1 Selecting an input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown below The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of which input is selected The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable Default parameter settings differ from input to input The INPUT SETUP menus shown below indicate default parameter settings for each input GAME INPUT SETUP NAME GAME DIGITALIN OPTICAL 4 ANALOG IN ANALOG 6 ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN COMPOSITE 2 COMPONENT IN 2 CH Oop 5 1a MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIG
87. DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION Parameter ON SCREEN DISPLAY Refer to page 3 63 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Refer to page 3 65 A V SYNC DELAY OFF CUSTOM NAME OFF EDIT CUSTOM NAME Default Setting Possible Setting OFF 1 to 60ms ON OFF Refer to page 3 62 A V SYNC DELAY Restores audio video synchronization when the MC 12 is connected to components such as video processors that introduce video signal delays Select a value between 1 and 60ms to activate an audio signal delay to compensate for the video signal delay OFF 1 to 60ms DISPLAY SETUP OFF 1 to 60ms ON SCREEN DISPLAY FRONT PANEL DISPLAY A V SYNC DELAY x ON CUSTOM NAME ig OFF EDIT CUSTOM NAME CUSTOM NAME Ei EX ON OFF Activates the display of the custom unit name which can be created with the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu When is selected the custom unit name scrolls across the on screen and front panel displays whenever the MC 12 is activated When OFF is selected the custom unit name does not scroll across the on screen and front panel displays when the MC 12 is activated 3 61 Setup Lexicon DISPLAY SETUP continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION EDIT CUSTOM NAME Eig Dn Opens the EDIT CUSTO
88. DNESS OFF ON OFF BALANCE lt l gt L lt to lt l gt to gt R FADER lt l gt B lt to lt l gt to gt F ZONE2 BALANCE lt l gt L lt to lt l gt to gt R REC BALANCE lt l gt B lt to lt l gt to gt F AUDIO CONTROLS menu parameter descriptions begin on the next page 4 2 12 Audio Controls BASS 6 0dB to 6 0dB COE 2 Bass Controls the amount of low frequency boost or cut applied to the LII Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center LFE and Subwoofer L R The graph to the right indicates the frequency 50 NN response of all BASS parameter settings To control the bass from the remote control Press the Shift button e Press the CD button to increase the BASS parameter setting in 0 5dB increments e Press the TAPE button to decrease the BASS parameter setting in 0 5dB increments e Press the OSD button to set the BASS TREBLE and TILT EQ parameters to 0 0dB The BASS parameter controls the amount of low frequency boost or cut applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center LFE and Subwoofer L R 4 3 Audio Controls Lexicon TREBLE 6 0dB to 6 0dB me Controls the amount of boost or cut applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R and Center The graph shown at the right indicates the frequency response of all TREBLE parameter settings To control the treble from the remote co
89. DTS ES DTS ES DTS ES ES DECODING OFF DTS DTS DTS 5 24 12 Mode Adjust EAs z FILM amp 122 FILM TAN e ERZERETIU on fae JETT These proprietary Lexicon listening modes use an advanced matrix to decode seven channels from 5 1 and 6 1 channel film sources with enhanced front steering When both side and rear speakers are present the DTS ES L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES or 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES film sources The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the ES DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0 6 0 3 0dB 0 0dB FRONT STEERING FILM OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1 to 30ms LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0 to 0 0dB ES DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions LL MUSIC amp MUSIC c EEN ELT T
90. ERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO USE LAST 3 12 12 2 Ex e E EE Opens the 2 CH MODE menu which selects a preferred listening mode for 2 channel input sources The MC 12 activates the preferred listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new 2 channel source is present When set to USE LAST the MC 12 automatically uses the listening mode that was activated the last time a 2 channel source was present Note The remote control 2 CH button toggles between the 2 CHANNEL listening mode and the previous listening mode and ignores the USE LAST setting Instead it uses the listening mode for example L7 FILM that was activated before the 2 CHANNEL listening mode When the 2 CH parameter is set to USE LAST e ADTS Neo 6 listening mode is used if a DTS Neo 6 listening mode was activated the last time a 2 channel source was present However DTS Neo 6 listening modes cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 2 channel sources The MC 12 requires the presence of a 44 1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source to activate a DTS Neo 6 listening mode The DTS Neo 6 listening modes are not available with 88 2kHz or 96kHz Dolby Digital or analog sources e A Dolby listening mode is used if a Dolby PLIIx listening mode was activated the last time a 2 channel source was present However the Dolby PLIIx listenin
91. For this reason the MC 12 does not send calibration noise signals to the Subwoofer L R and LFE output connectors during speaker distance calibration Instead the MC 12 automatically calibrates subwoofer and LFE subwoofer distances to the shortest distance of the other speakers These distances can be manually adjusted See PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION on page 3 53 This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option is selected The SETTING LEVELS screen displays when the MC 12 calibrates output levels The MC 12 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING LEVELS screen The cursor automatically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters highlighting each parameter while the MC 12 calcu lates an output level for the corresponding speaker As it finishes each parameter the MC 12 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label 3 48 12 Setup DISTANCES AUTO DISTANCES gt T LEFT FRONT LEFT 12 011 OK CENTER 10 54 FRONT RIGHT 12 0ft Refer to the table on page 3 51 for information about SIDE RIGHT 4 5ft all possible speaker calibra REAR RIGHT ERROR tion messages REAR LEFT 6 0ft SIDE LEFT 4 5ft MONO SUB SUB RIGHT When the MC 12 is finished calibrating speaker distances the AUTO DISTANCES screen displays indicating the
92. HT LEFT amp RIGHT LEFT SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg 10deg to 90deg LISTENER POS 0 127 to 127 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 13 Mode Adjust Lexicon Front Left Front Right Fromt Left Center Primary Listening Position Front Left Front Right Front Right L127 To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode 1 Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primary listening position Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primary listening position are properly measured To do this select one of the following options e Select the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option to have the MC 12 automatically calibrate speaker distances e Measure the distance between the primary listening posi tion and the front baffle of each speaker Then set the cor responding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu parameters to the closest available value Sit in the primary listening position If the primary listening position is not centered between the front left and right speakers as shown in illustration B above set the PANORAMA CALIBRATION gt LISTENER POS parameter to compensate for the difference using the remote control and arrow C buttons Each increment within the 127 to 127 parameter range represents about one third of an inch Illustration A shows the left of cente
93. HX 80Hz CONFIGURATION LFE OFF THX ULTRA2 SUB VAN D 80Hz THX 80Hz lt TH 80Hz lt wA aD THxjB0Hz THx BOHz THx80Hz Tx 80Hz When a THX speaker setup is selected the MC 12 applies a THX 80Hz crossover point with a 12dB per octave filter to the Front L R Center Side L R and Rear L R output connectors The MC 12 applies a THX 80Hz crossover point with a 24dB per octave filter to the Subwoofer L R output connectors Notes e THX speaker setup is not required to activate THX listening modes e the THX SETUP menu only the REAR L R THX ULTRA2 SUB BGC and ASA parameters can be changed 3 25 Setup Lexicon SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS The table below indicates the speaker setup parameters for config uring the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup These parameters are available on the CUSTOM SETUP and THX SETUP menus Speaker setup parameters perform the same function regardless of the selected speaker setup When a parameter setting is adjusted on one menu the corresponding parameter setting is automatically adjusted on the other menu For example when a THX speaker setup is selected the speaker setup parameters on the CUSTOM SETUP menu are set to THX 80Hz CUSTOM SETUP Menu THX SETUP Menu Parameter Default Setting Possible Setting Default Setting Possible Settings FRONT L
94. Hz 80Hz 80Hz Note It is important to set crossover points before calibrating output levels or LIVE Otherwise setting crossover points afterwards could invalidate calibrated output levels and will invalidate the LIVE calibration 3 22 12 Setup MAIN MENU gt SETUP SPEAKER SETUP CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS CUSTOM SETUP FRONT L R 80 Hz AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES THX SETUP CENTER 80 Hz SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG AUTOMATIC SIDE L R 80 Hz DISPLAYS MANUAL REAR L R 80 Hz VOLUME CONTROLS rq a FAs SUB L R MONO TRIGGERS SET CROSSOVERS SUB XOVER 80 Hz LOCK OPTIONS BEFORE CALIBRATING OFF LIVE CALIBRATION rq THX ULTRA2 SUB OFF BGC N A A We p ASA APART 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUPS EG BELEN c EER c Selecting the CROSSOVER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opens the CUSTOM SETUP menu which assigns independent crossover points for each Main Zone audio output connector Crossover points can be selected in 10Hz increments within a 30 to 120Hz range The graphs shown on the next page indicate the frequency response of each crossover point To configure a custom speaker setup e Select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the associated speakers For example set the FRONT L R parameter to the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the front speakers Select the subwoofer crossove
95. IC Lum gt 5 1 This listening mode designed for playback of Dolby Digital encoded mono sources uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to use all channels This dramatically increases the perceived width and sense of envel opment of the listening space Note that e When 1 0 Dolby Digital source is present the MC 12 auto matically activates the 5 1 MONO LOGIC listening mode e When the Shift command bank is activated pressing the TVL button activates the 5 1 MONO LOGIC listening mode for 5 1 channel sources Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EFFECT LVL 9 12 to 6dB ACADEMY FILTER ON ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 1 MONO SURR Lum Q 5 1 MONO SURR This listening mode designed for playback of Dolby Digital encoded mono sources sends mono signals to all channels Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 1 MONO ms 5 1 This listening mode designed for playback of Dolby Digital encoded mono sources sends mono signals to the center channel Parameter Default Setting Possible
96. IGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 1 2 1e FILM oa D 5 1 151 FILM cits 97 5 1a 47 FILM LIVE MED gt DVD1 DIGITAL IN 1 2 COAX 3 COAX 4 COAX 5 COAX 6 OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL 6 AES EBU NONE MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED Note The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM 44 1 48 88 2 and 96kHz Dolby Digital and DTS ES sources The digital audio input connectors are not compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources DIGITAL IN COAX 1 TO 6 OPTICAL 1 TO 6 AES EBU NONE Opens the DIGITAL IN menu to assign a digital audio input connector for the selected input A digital audio input connector must be assigned if no analog audio input connector is assigned When no analog audio input connector is assigned the MC 12 automatically sets the e MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL e INPUT SELECT menu ZONE2 IN parameter to DIGITAL e INPUT SELECT menu RECORD IN parameter to DIGITAL 3 7 Setup Lexicon ASSIGNING AUDIO amp VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS continued ANALOG IN ANALOC 1 TO 8 5 1 ANLG 6 8 LIVE NONE gt INPUTS gt ANALOG IN Opens the ANALOG IN menu to assign an analog audio input connector for the selected input An analog audio input connector must be assigned if no digi
97. IT parameter setting 3 58 12 Setup LFE LIMITER ADJ 75 to 120dB To set the LFE LIMIT ADJ parameter serur sreaxens STREET e pass peax 9 LFE LIMITER ADJ Specifies the output level restriction the MC 12 applies to the LFE output connector 2 Select the LFE LIMIT ADJ parameter The parameter initally sets to 75dB Press the and arrow buttons to change the parameter value The selected output level restriction is applied when the LFE LIMITER parameter is set to ON REAR PANEL CONFIGURATION 8 STEREO INPUTS CONFIG menu shown below to configure the analog audio input Select the 8 STEREO INPUTS option to configure the analog audio connectors as eight Left Right stereo connectors or as five input connectors as eight stereo connectors Selecting the REAR PANEL CONFIG option displays the REAR PANEL Left Right stereo connectors and one 5 1 channel configuration Front L R Center Subwoofer Side L R When 8 STEREO INPUTS is selected REAR PANEL CONFIG 8 STEREO INPUTS SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP 5 STEREO amp 5 1 ANLG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS 5 STEREO amp 5 1ANLG TRIGGERS FOR REAR PANEL CFG LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION 8 STEREO INPUTS FOR REAR PANEL CFG All analog audio input connectors are configured as stereo connectors
98. ITAL RECORD ADVANCED TAPE INPUT SETUP NAME TAPE DIGITALIN OPTICAL 5 ANALOG IN ANALOG 7 ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN NONE COMPONENT IN 2 CH Oop dits 5 1a 5 1a rz FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG RECORD IN ANLG RECORD ADVANCED TUNER INPUT SETUP NAME TUNER DIGITAL IN NONE ANALOG IN ANALOG 8 ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN NONE COMPONENT IN 2 CH Oop 5 1a 5 1a 121 FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG RECORD IN ANLG RECORD ADVANCED AUX INPUT SETUP NAME AUX DIGITALIN OPTICAL 6 ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN COMPOSITE 3 COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH rz MUSIC Doo 5 1 rz MUSIC dts 5 1a 5 FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED 12 Appendix MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP DVD1 INPUT NAME EDIT INPUT NAME RESTORE DEFAULT NAME PRESS MENU TO RESTORE INPUT NAME EDIT INPUT NAME DVD1 4 BUTTONS TO EDIT UP TO 8 CHARACTERS BUTTON TO ADVANCE DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 2 COAX 3 COAX 4 COAX 5 COAX 6 OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL 6 AES EBU NONE SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION DVD1 ANALOG IN ANALOG 1 ANALOG 2 ANALOG 3 ANALOG 4 ANALOG 5 ANALOG 6 ANALOG 7 ANLG 6 8 ANALOG 8 NO
99. L ADVANCED REVERB LVL 00 EARLY RFLXLVL 130 BASS XOVER 156Hz SHAPE 0 SPREAD 0 SIZE 19m LIVE MED MID RT 1 84s BASS RT 2 76s ROLLOFF 2 4kHz TREB CUT RT 3 1kHz PRE DELAY 18ms ADVANCED CUSTOM LIVE MED ADVANCED REVERB LV 4dB EARLY RFLXLVL 14dB BASS XOVER 156Hz SHAPE 2 SPREAD 25 SIZE 30m LIVE LARGE MID RT BASS RT ROLLOFF TREB CUT RT PRE DELAY ADVANCED CUSTOM MC 12 Appendix Selecting the listening mode menu CALIBRATION OUTPUT LEVELS or CUSTOM option opens the corresponding menu path shown below The CALIBRATION option is available for the PANORAMA listening mode The OUTPUT LEVELS and CUSTOM options are available for most listening modes These menus are identical regardless of which listening mode is selected Listening mode menu parameter drop down menus are shown below and on the next page PANORAMA EFFECT LVL 40B BASS CONTENT STEREO LOW FREQ WIDTH 0 SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms INPUT BALANCE lt CALIBRATION OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM Selecting a listening mode menu parameter opens the corresponding parameter drop down menu shown below and on the next page These drop down menus are identical PANORAMA CALIBRATION SOURCE LEFT amp RIGHT SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg LISTENER POS 0 NOTE ENSURE THAT SPEAKER SETUP HAS BEEN PROPERLY PERFORMED MONO LOGIC EFFECT LVL 9dB ACADMY FILTER ON SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM OUTPUT LEVELS
100. LEVELS OUTPUT LEVELS gt AUTO SPEAKER SETUP TEST WILL BEGIN IN 10 DISPLAYS YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR SIT QUIETLY PRESS gt TO SKIP VOLUME CONTROLS COUNTDOWN TRIGGERS SET CROSSOVERS LOCK OPTIONS BEFORE CALIBRATING L PLACE MICROPHONES IN PRIMARY LISTENING POSITIONS LIVE CALIBRATION PRESS TO BEGIN COUNTDOWN MIC CHECK REQUIRED FOR AUTO CALIBRATION SETTING DISTANCES SETTING LEVELS FRONT LEFT FRONT LEFT 0 008 DISTANCES OK AUTO SPEAKER SETUP AUTO SPEAKER SETUP When the MC 12 is finished calibrating speaker DISTANCES ERROR distances and output levels the AUTO SPEAKER CENTER CENTER i LEVELS OK LEVELS ERROR SETUP results screen shown at the left will open on FRONT RIGHT FRONT RIGHT 10 008 the on screen display indicating the results for SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT 0 0dB i AUTO VALUES APPLIED AUTO VALUES APPLIED each calibration procedure Press the and REAR RIGHT 0 048 PRESS TO VIEW PRESS TO VIEW arrow buttons to highlight the desired calibration REAR LEFT REAR LEFT EE DETAILS DETAILS SIDE LEFT SIDE LEFT NETUS procedure Then press the arrow button to SUB MONO SUB MONO EI d select this procedure Selecting DISTANCES opens SUB RIGHT SUB RIGHT NA Bia OK the AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below LFE LFE WA Selecting th
101. Lexicon P continued PLIIx MOV listening mode 5 20 PLIIx MUS listening mode 5 20 POSITION parameter 3 63 power switch 2 7 PRE DELAY parameter 5 10 5 12 5 41 program operation parameters 3 68 3 69 R REAR DLY OFFSET parameter 5 5 5 6 5 12 5 16 5 17 5 25 5 28 5 29 5 42 REAR L R parameter 3 26 3 28 3 29 3 36 5 35 5 42 REAR LEFT parameter 3 34 rear panel MC 12 2 6 MC 12 Balanced 2 8 overview 2 6 REAR PANEL CONFIG menu 3 2 REAR RIGHT parameter 3 34 REC BALANCE parameter 4 2 REC PWR ON parameter 3 66 RECORD ADVANCED menu 3 20 A 20 RECORD ADVANCED parameter 3 15 RECORD BALANCE parameter 4 7 A 22 RECORD IN parameter 3 15 3 18 3 19 20 RECORD parameter 3 20 A 20 Record parameter 3 21 Record Zone 2 19 record zone audio output connectors 2 9 record zone video output connectors 2 9 RE EQUALIZER parameter 5 5 5 7 5 9 5 16 5 17 5 19 5 25 5 26 5 28 5 30 5 42 remote control arrow buttons 2 11 battery installation 1 6 BLUE button 2 16 command bank activation 2 13 command matrix 2 14 FP button 2 16 input selection buttons 2 14 light button 2 14 Main Zone 2 14 menu button 2 11 operation considerations 2 10 OSD button 2 16 overview 2 10 Record Zone 2 14 Shift 2 14 Zone 2 2 14 REMOTE ONLY parameter 3 68 3 69 REMOTE STATE parameter 3 63 3 64 A 22 removable access panel 2 10 RESET MODE parameter 5 36 5 42 RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
102. M n A 5 Listening Mode Descriptions seen 5 5 Installation Worksheet eese A 20 Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions 5 37 Mode Parameter 5 45 12 Introduction ENGLISH IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Save these instructions for later use Follow all instructions and warnings marked on the unit Follow all instructions and warnings marked on the unit Always use with the correct line voltage Refer to the manufacturer s operating instructions for power requirements Be advised that different operating voltages may require the use of a different line cord and or attachment plug Do not install the unit in an unventilated rack or directly above heat producing equipment such as power amplifiers Observe the maximum ambient operating temperature listed in the product specification Slots and openings on the case are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable oper ation and prevent it from overheating these openings must not be blocked or cov ered Never push objects of any kind through any of the ventilation slots Never spill liquid of any kind on the unit Never attach audio power amplifier outputs directly to any of the unit s connectors To prevent shock or fire hazard do not expose the unit to rain or moisture or oper ate it where it will be exposed to water Do not at
103. M NAME drop down menu shown above which can be used to create a custom unit name The factory default unit name is MC 12 To create a custom unit name 1 Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path shown above to open the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop down menu 2 When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu drops down locate the current unit name on the second line The cursor automatically appears beneath the first character in the current unit name 3 Use the following remote control commands to enter a unit name e Press the a or v arrow button to change the character above the cursor e Pressthe button to advance to the next character space The cursor will automatically wrap to the first character space when the last twentieth character space is passed DISPLAY SETUP ON SCREEN DISPLAY FRONT PANEL DISPLAY AN SYNC DELAY OFF CUSTOM NAME OFF EDIT CUSTOM NAME EDIT CUSTOM NAME 12 4 BUTTONS TO EDIT UP TO 20 CHARACTERS BUTTON TO ADVANCE Pressing will close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop down menu 4 When the desired custom unit name has been entered press until the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu closes 3 62 12 Setup ON SCREEN DISPLAY The ON SCREEN DISPLAY option opens the ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu to customize the on screen display MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS CUSTOM NAME VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE C
104. MATIC MANUAL PLACE MICROPHONES IN PRIMARY LISTENING POSITIONS SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING When an ERROR message appears on the last CHECK MICROPHONES screen pressing the 4 arrow but ton opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu When no ERROR message appears on the last CHECK MICRO PHONES screen pressing the 4 arrow button opens the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES GROUP MICROPHONES INTO A BUNDLE IN THE MIDDLE OF THE ROOM PRESS TO BEGIN MIC CHECK CHECK MICROPHONES MIC 1 ERROR MIC 2 OK MIC 3 OK MIC 4 OK PRESS TO VIEW DETAILS gt MICROPHONE OK CHECK MICROPHONES CHECKING FOR SILENCE PLEASE WAIT MICROPHONE NOT DETECTED or MICROPHONE SIGNAL TOO LOW or MICROPHONE OUT OF RANGE or MICROPHONE TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE CHECK MICROPHONES CHECKING MICROPHONES PLEASE WAIT When an ERROR mes sage appears on the last CHECK MICROPHONES screen press the and arrow buttons to high light the desired micro phone Then press the arrow button to view more details about the error One of the mes sages shown to the left will appear in the on screen display MC 12 Appendix MAIN MENU SETUP SPEAKER SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG AUTO SPEAKER SETUP gt AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES amp LEVELS CAUTION DISTANCES HIGH AUDIO
105. ME menu opens press the remote control 4 or v buttons to highlight the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option Press the gt arrow button to select this option The message PRESS MENU gt TO RESTORE INPUT NAME appears in the on screen and front panel displays Press the button to restore the factory default name and close the message Press the button to close the message without restoring the factory default name of the selected input 3 6 12 Setup ASSIGNING AUDIO amp VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS The MC 12 has 12 inputs each of which can be assigned to any depending on compatibility of its 13 digital audio 8 analog audio 5 composite video 8 S video or 4 component video input connectors MAIN MENU SETUP INPUT SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS DVD1 AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS DVD2 SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG LD DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS SAT TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to assign audio and video input connectors The ANLG IN LVL parameter can be used to adjust 2 channel and 5 1 analog audio input levels for the selected input Parameter Possible Settings DIGITAL IN COAX 1 to 6 OPTICAL 1 to 6 AES EBU NONE ANALOG IN ANALOG 1 to 8 5 1 ANLG 6 8 LIVE NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO 18dB to 12dB VIDEO IN COMPOSITE 1 to 5 S VIDEO 1 to 8 NONE COMPONENT IN COMPONENT 1 to 4 DVD1 INPUT SETUP DVD1 D
106. N LVL En gt End mi Opens the ANLG IN LVL menu to adjust the 2 channel and 5 1 channel when the MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF analog audio input levels for the selected input Analog audio sources have a wide range of levels To compensate the MC 12 allows independent input level adjustment of each stereo analog audio input connector The input level of the 5 1 channel analog audio input connector is only adjustable when the ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF AUTO 18 to 12 dB Parameter Possible Settings AUTO ON OFF MANUAL 18 to 12dB AUTO GAIN 18 to 12dB This parameter cannot be adjusted MAIN MENU SETUP INPUT SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS DVD1 AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION DVD1 INPUT SETUP gt DVD1 ANLG IN LVL ON DVD1 AUTO DIGITAL IN COAX 1 MANUAL 018 ANALOG IN NONE iss 18 to 12dB ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 1 Note Adjustments made on the ANLG IN LVL menu are applied to the stereo analog audio input connector assigned for the selected input When another stereo analog audio input connector is assigned these adjustments are automatically applied to the new connector AUTO ON OFF EX gt EZ E m gt mma Provides automatic adjustment of 2 channel and 5 1 channel when the MAIN ADVANCED gt ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set
107. NCES menu to select the desired speaker distances 1 Press the 4 arrow button to return to the SET DISTANCES menu Press the or arrow button to tog le between calibrated speaker distances AUTO and original speaker distances The speaker graphics at the bottom of the menu update to indicate the selected values Press the button to apply the selected values A confirmation message displays to indicate the applied values Press the 4 button twice in succession to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu FRONT LEFT 12 0ft ORIGINAL DISTANCES CENTER 10 5ft FRONT RIGHT 12 011 SIDE RIGHT 4 5ft d REAR RIGHT ERROR 7 REAR LEFT 6 0ft DISTANCES amp LEVELS AUTO SPEAKER SETUP AUTO DISTANCES DISTANCES AUTO VALUES APPLIED PRESS TO VIEW DETAILS Use the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu to select speaker distances or levels 1 2 Press the 4 arrow button to return to the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen To select the other calibration procedure follow the instructions in Step 5 Otherwise press the button to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu The AUTO DISTANCES screen is shown above as an example The AUTO LEVELS screen can be substituted OK A FRONT LEFT 12 0ft LEVELS ERROR CENTER 10 5ft FRONT RIGHT 12 0ft SIDE RIGHT 4 5ft REAR RIGHT ERROR REAR LEFT 6 0ft SIDE LEFT 4 5ft MONO SUB N A SUB RIGHT N A LFE N A LEVELS SET LEVELS AUTO LEVELS AUTO LEVELS FRONT LEFT ORIGINAL LEVELS CENTE
108. NE LIVE DVD1 ANLG IN LVL AUTO MANUAL AUTO GAIN 0 00 18 to 1208 a ON OFF re x EE INPUT SETUP DVD1 2 LD TV SAT VCR cD PVR GAME TAPE TUNER AUX DVD1 VIDEO IN COMPOSITE 1 COMPOSITE 2 COMPOSITE 3 COMPOSITE 4 COMPOSITE 5 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 2 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 4 S VIDEO 5 S VIDEO 6 S VIDEO 7 S VIDEO 8 NONE DVD1 COMPONENT COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 4 DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN 1 ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH rz FILM baf 5 1 15 FILM dts 5 1a 5 1a FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED DVD1 2 CH MODE 121 MUSIC SURR DUPLI IHX OOPLII MOVIE MUSIC THX 0 LOGIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO USE LAST Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the corresponding menu shown below These menus are identical regardless of which input is selected The MAIN ADV and RECORD ADV menus shown on the next page indicate factory default parame ter settings for each input DIGITAL ANLG DVD1 DOD MODE DODIGITAL 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO USE LAST 1 MODE USE LAST DVD1 5 1 MODE 5 1a 121 FILM
109. NO SUB RIGHT LFE SET DISTANCES AUTO DISTANCES ORIGINAL DISTANCES rq R AN ra 0 0ft 0 0ft 0 0ft q gt 0 0ft lt wA p 0 0ft 0 0ft 0 0ft 0 0ft ORIGINAL DISTANCES APPLIED SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING FOR AUTO CALIBRATION MIC CHECK REQUIRED The AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below indicates the individual calibration results for each speaker Press the and arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker calibration parameter Then press the 4 arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker AUTO DISTANCES FRONT LEFT ERROR CENTER 0 0ft FRONT RIGHT 0 0ft SIDE RIGHT 0 0ft REAR RIGHT 0 0ft REAR LEFT 0 0ft SIDE LEFT 0 0ft SUB MONO 0 0ft SUB RIGHT LFE AUTO DISTANCES irn APPLIED SPEAKER SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE SPEAKER SIGNAL TOO LOW SPEAKER UNABLE TO CALCULATE SPEAKER MAY NOT BE ACCURATE SPEAKER OK SPEAKER SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED PLACE MICROPHONE AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES amp LEVELS DISTANCES OUTPUT LEVELS IN PRIMARY LISTENING POSITIONS SETTING LEVELS FRONT LEFT CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT
110. O amp 5 1 ANLG MUTE LEVEL AUDIO CONTROL ZONE PWR ON SETUP REC PWR ON MAX VOLUME A 21 Appendix Lexicon INSTALLATION WORKSHEET continued DISPLAY SETUP TRIGGER 1 SETUP TRIGGER 2 SETUP ON SCREEN DISPLAY Circle all parameters set to ON Circle all parameters set to ON STATUS POSITION FORMAT BACKGROUND REMOTE STATE FRONT PANEL DISPLAY STATUS BRIGHTNESS A N SYNC DELAY CUSTOM NAME EDIT CUSTOM NAME AUDIO CONTROLS BASS TREBLE TILT EQ LOUDNESS BALANCE FADER ZONE2 BALANCE RECORD BALANCE REMOTE ONLY 2 CH SURROUND DVD1 2 CHANNEL DVD2 MONO LOGIC LD MONO SURROUND TV MONO SAT 5 1 i FILM VCR 5 1 Iz TV CD 5 1 Iz MUSIC PVR GAME MUSIC TAPE 5 1 PLIIx MOV TUNER 5 1 MUS AUX 00 DIGITAL EX ZONE2 INPUTS RECORD INPUTS 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC z ral 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO E MUSIC SURR ZEE S Ermss rz MUSIC PLilx THX THX MUS FIM PLII 195 Ermss 2 CHAN 00 PLII MOVIE 5 FILM PLII MUSIC 5 1a MUSIC 00 5 1a THX SurEX 00 5 1a THX MUSIC 3 5 1a STANDARD a 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 5 1a BYPASS NIGHTCLUB 2CH BYPASS CONCERT HALL LIVE SMALL CHURCH LIVE MED CATHEDRAL LIVE LARGE PANORAMA REMOTE ONLY DVD1 DVD2 LD TV SAT VCR CD PVR GAME TAPE
111. ODE DESCRIPTIONS The MC 12 offers an assortment of listening modes for 2 channel Dolby Digital DTS ES analog and microphone sources Listening mode descriptions begin below and continue in the order shown on the MODE ADJUST menu The table included with each description indicates the corresponding listening mode menu parameters as well as their factory default and possible parameter settings All listening mode menus are shown in the Appendix Descriptions of the listening mode parameters begin on page 5 37 m FILM This listening mode designed for enhanced playback of 2 channel stereo or matrix encoded film sources LOGIC 7 FILM is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that derives seven channels from 2 channel input sources Logic 7 also derives full frequency stereo surround channels that realistically increase the perceived width length and sense of envelopment of the listening space Logic 7 provides remarkable improvement compared to other decoders Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings AUTO AZIMUTH ON OFF VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB 6 0 3 0dB 0 0dB RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR FRONT NEUTRAL REAR 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF OFF 1 to 30ms Refer to page 5 35 Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptio
112. OLS SETUP SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATION R SR RR SET CROSSOVERS lt A D BEFORE CALIBRATING 0 048 0 0dB n 0 008 KA e al 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB Manual Options DetailsB SPEAKER DISTANCES Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of speaker distances LEVELS CALIBRATION Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels INTERNAL NOISE TEST Automatically sends an internal calibration noise signal to each Main Zone audio output connector allowing for simultaneous output level adjustment EXTERNAL NOISE TEST Requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc Activates an appropriate listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source BASS PEAK LIMITERS Provides amplitude limits for low frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Subwoofer L R and LFE and low frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors Protects speakers against input sources that produce low frequency signal peaks 3 52 12 Setup PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION SETUP Fo SPEAKERS 5 MANUAL 9 SPEAKER DISTANCES Selec
113. OLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION METERS FEET 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATION sA PR 60Hz 40Hz 40Hz INTERNAL NOISE HIGH AUDIO LEVELS LEVELS CALIBRATION INTERNAL NOISE TEST EXTERNAL NOISE TEST BASS PEAK LIMITER SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST FRONT LEFT 0 00 CENTER 0 00 FRONT RIGHT 0 00 SIDE RIGHT 0 00 RIGHT 0 00B REAR LEFT 0 00 SIDE LEFT 0 00 SUB MONO 0 00 SUB RIGHT N A LFE N A a puso 18 to 12dB BASS PEAK LIMITER CAL NOISE L R LIMITER L R LIMIT ADJ 100dB LFE LIMITER ON LFE LIMIT ADJ 100dB CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS gt 7510 1200 ON ig OFF A 13 Appendix Lexicon MENU TREE continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION AUDIO CONTROLS BASS TREBLE TILT EQ LOUDNESS BALANCE FADER ZONE2 BALANCE RECORD BALANCE YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR SIT QUIETLY PRESS gt TO BEGIN COUNTDOWN LIVE CALIBRATION CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS lt
114. ONO SURR 5 1 all DTS modes and all 5 1a modes except 5 1a STANDARD and 5 1a BYPASS LISTENER POS PANORAMA CALIBRATION 5 46 12 Mode Adjust The parameter Is used in these modes LIVENESS NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL LOW FREQ WIDTH PANORAMA MASTER LEVEL 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL MID RT CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes OUTPUT LEVELS All except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes PANORAMA DPLII MUSIC and DPLIIx MUSIC PRE DELAY RE EQUALIZER NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes L7 FILM L7 TV DPLII THX DPLIIx THX 5 1 L7 FILM 5 1 L7 TV THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX THX DTS ES L7 FILM DTS ES THX ULTRA2 DTS ES THX 5 1a L7 FILM 5 1a THX ULTRA2 5 1a THX SurEX 5 1a THX REAR DLY OFFSET All L7 modes and PANORAMA REAR L R All except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes RESET MODE All modes REVERB LVL All LIVE modes ROLLOFF NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes SHAPE All LIVE modes SIDE L R All except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes SIZE NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes SOUND STAGE All L7
115. Possible Settings REMOTE ONLY ON ON OFF Program Operation OFF ON OFF All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters except the REMOTE ONLY parameter are considered program operation parameters 1 OGTT T OnT gt TRIGGER SETUP REMOTE ONLY DVD1 TUNER ZONE2 INPUTS RECORD INPUTS rz FILM te TV rz MUSIC tz MUSIC SURR OO T Oo PLitx MOV Oo MUS OO PLII 2 PLII MOVIE PLII MUSIC OO PL TEX Do PRO LOGIC CIN Cites MUSIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HHALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO 5 1 FILM 5 115 TV 5 1 1 MUSIC THX IEZ MUSIC 5 1 MOV TRIGGER SETUP 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO emes FILM dts dits 23122 4 Cmax MUSIC dts LL Cortes 2 CHAN 5 1a 1 FILM 5 MUSIC 5 1a ISX SurEX 5 1a TEX MUSIC 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 5 1a BYPASS 26 LIVE MED LIVE LARGE 3 68 12 TRIGGER SETUP continued REMOTE ONLY EX EZB Configures the selected trigger output connector for remote operation Select the ON setting to configure the selected connector for remote operation Select the OFF setting to configure the selected connector for program operation Refer to the Program Operation Parameter description below for more information ON OFF When configured
116. R rq R EARN D FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT nas MONO SUB 0 098 0 098 0 0dB 0 048 0 0dB 0 048 c Use the SET LEVELS menu to select the desired speaker levels 1 Press the 4 arrow button to return to the SET LEVELS menu e Press the 4 and arrow buttons to toggle between calibrated output levels AUTO and original output levels The speaker graphics at the bottom of the menu update to indicate the selected val ues e Press the gt arrow button to apply the selected values A confirmation message displays to indicate the applied values Press the arrow button twice in suc cession to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu 3 50 MC 12 Setup Message Description Troubleshooting SPEAKER The MC 12 successfully calibrated the value N A OK for the selected speaker without error SPEAKER The selected speaker is not present in the Set the corresponding CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu parameter to include the selected SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED speaker setup speaker in the speaker setup The MC 12 only calibrates values for speakers that are included in the speaker setup SPEAKER SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE The microphones detected out of phase calibration noise signals but the cali brated value is still accurate Examine speaker associated amplifier connections to ensure that speaker wires are not crossed Dipolar speakers c
117. R 80Hz FULL FULL SUB 30Hz to 120Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz CENTER 80Hz FULL FULL SUB 30Hz to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz SIDE L R 80Hz FULL FULL SUB 30Hz to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz REAR L R 80Hz FULL FULL SUB 30Hz to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz NONE SUB L R MONO MONO STEREO NONE MONO MONO SUB XOVER 80Hz FULL 30Hz to 120Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz LFE OFF ON OFF ON ON THX ULTRA2 SUB OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF BGC ON OFF 5 APART CLOSE TOGETHER APART APART CLOSE TOGETHER These parameters cannot be adjusted on the THX SETUP menu t When the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF the BGC parameter is not available N A 3 26 12 Setup MAIN MENU SETUP SPEAKER SETUP CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS CUSTOM SETUP FRONT L R 40Hz AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES THX SETUP CENTER 60Hz SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG AUTOMATIC SIDE L R 60Hz DISPLAYS MANUAL REAR L R 60Hz VOLUME CONTROLS d p SUB L R MONO TRIGGERS SET CROSSOVERS oe eae Ed SUB XOVER m LOCK OPTIONS BEFORE CALIBRATING K OFF LIVE CALIBRATION a THX ULTRA2 SUB N A Aad ve gt ASA APART 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz SUB XOVE SUBWOOFERS L R REAR L R SPEAKERS SIDE L R SPEAKERS CENTER SPEAKER FRONT L R SPEAKERS FULL MONO FULL FULL FULL FULL 30Hz STEREO FULL SUB FULL SUB FULL SUB FULL SUB 40Hz NONE
118. RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SURROUND EX AUTO AUTO ON OFF COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0 to 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions TEX MUSIC This listening mode is designed for playback of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital music sources and cannot be activated unless side and rear speakers are present ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 32 for more information For best results place the rear speakers close together in your home theater Note The THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the front panel or remote control Mode buttons Parameter Default Setting COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM Possible Settings AUTO ON OFF 10 0 to 0 0 Refer to page 5 35 Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 19 Mode Adjust Lexicon 5 1 PLIIx MOV The 5 1 PLIIx MOV MOVIE listening mode is designed to playback 7 1 discrete channels decoded from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital film sources The 5 1 PLIIx MOVIE listening mode can also be used with other types of Dolby Digital sources with mixed results The seven main channels are full freq
119. RR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1 to 30ms LFE MIX 0 0 10 0 to 0 0 OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 28 12 Mode Adjust 5 1a 4 MUSIC MODE ADIUST e 5 ta MUSIC The 5 1a LOGIC 7 MUSIC listening mode is similiar to the 5 1a LOGIC 7 FILM listening mode but specifically tailored for music sources This mode is designed and recommended for playback of 5 1 channel analog music sources Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0 6 0 3 0 0 0 FRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF ON OFF SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1 to 30ms LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0 to 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 1a EX UL2Cin 5 1a THX SurEX amp 5 1a EX gt on The 5 1a THX UL2Cin 5 1 THX SurEX and 5 1a THX listening modes are designed to convert 5 1 channel analog film sources that lack THX Surround EX encoding into seven channel audio The modes also a
120. RROUND MIX parameter 5 22 5 28 5 32 5 44 S VIDEO 16 9 parameter 3 16 T THX button 5 4 THX listening mode 5 18 THX SPEAKER SETUP screen 3 25 THX SurEX listening mode 5 18 THX ULTRA2 listening mode 5 18 5 29 5 30 THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter 3 26 3 31 TILT EQ parameter 4 2 4 5 TREBLE parameter 4 2 4 4 trigger output connectors 2 10 TRIGGER SETUP menu 3 2 troubleshooting 6 2 TV button 5 4 Two line Status Main Zone 2 19 12 Index T continued Record Zone 2 20 Zone 2 2 19 U UNITS parameter 3 34 USE LAST setting 3 13 V VIDEO IN menu 3 11 video input connectors component BNC 2 9 component RCA 2 9 composite 2 9 S video 2 9 video output connectors 2 9 component 2 9 composite 2 9 record zone 2 9 S video 2 9 VOCAL ENHANCE parameter 5 5 5 6 5 16 5 17 5 25 5 28 5 29 5 45 VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu 3 2 volume knob 2 3 WORD LENGTH parameter 2 26 7 zone 2 audio output connectors 2 7 ZONE PWR ON parameter 3 66 ZONE2 BALANCE parameter 4 2 4 7 ZONE2 IN parameter 3 15 3 18 3 19 Zones About 2 19 A Inside Back Cover fm Page 1 Monday May 9 2005 11 21 AM LIMITED WARRANTY Harman Specialty Group offers the following warranty on this product What is the Duration of this Warranty This warranty will remain in effect for three 3 years from the original date of purchase Who is Covered This warranty may be enforce
121. S EBU XLR connectors Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC 958 S PDIF standards Accepts 44 1 48 88 2 and 96kHz sample rates Accepts 16 24 bits PCM audio Dolby Digital DTS and DTS ES discrete data formats Main Zone Audio Outputs Zone 2 Audio Outputs 12unbalanced RCA and 12 balanced XLR MC 12 Balanced only connectors for Front L R Center LFE Subwoofer L R Side L R and Rear L R and Auxiliary L R 2unbalanced RCA 1 fixed and 1 variable output level stereo connectors and 1 balanced stereo connector XLR variable output level MC 12 Balanced only Main Zone Audio Performance Output Level Output Impedance 150mVrms typical 6Vrms maximum RCA connectors 300mVrms typical 12Vrms maximum XLR connectors MC 12 Balanced only Maximum value with full scale input signal and volume at 12dB 1000 in parallel with 150pF RCA connectors 50Q in parallel with 150pF XLR connectors MC 12 Bal anced only Zone 2 amp Record Zone Audio Performance A D Conversion 24 bit 44 1 to 96kHz dual bit AX architecture Record Zone only Record Zone Audio Outputs 2unbalanced RCA 1 fixed and 1 variable output level stereo connectors 1 S PDIF coaxial RDA and 1 S PDIF optical TosLink connector in parallel D A Conversion 24 bit 44 1 to 192kHz multi bit AX architecture Frequency Response 10Hz to 20kHz 0 1dB 0 25dB 0 75dB at 40kHz refer en
122. S VIDEO 6 S VIDEO 7 S VIDEO 8 NONE gt DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 E COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH rz FILM Bap 5 1 FILM dts CCRC 5 1a 7 FILM LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED DVD1 COMPONENT IN COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 4 3 11 Setup Lexicon SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES The MC 12 allows the selection of five preferred listening modes for each Main Zone input one listening mode each for 2 channel Dolby Digital DTS ES 5 1 channel analog and MIC LIVE sources The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu param eters that can be used to select preferred listening modes Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters 2 CH Selects a preferred listening mode for 2 channel sources 000 Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources Eres Selects a preferred listening mode for DTS ES sources 5 1a Selects a preferred listening mode for 5 1 channel analog sources MIC Selects a preferred listening mode for microphone source LIVE Menus showing DVD1 parameters selected as preferred listening modes INPUT SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS DVD1 AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION MAIN MENU SETUP When a preferred listening mode i
123. S listening mode 5 4 5 27 DTS ES parameter 3 12 3 14 DTS ES THX listening mode 5 4 5 26 E EARLY RFLX LVL parameter 5 39 EDIT CUSTOM NAME parameter 3 61 3 62 A 22 EDIT INPUT NAME menu 3 5 EFFECT LVL parameter 5 10 5 12 5 15 5 23 5 39 ES DECODING parameter 5 24 5 26 5 28 5 38 5 40 5 42 ES ENCODING parameter 2 21 2 22 2 25 EX DECODING parameter 5 20 5 22 5 39 EX ENCODING parameter 2 25 External Noise Test 3 52 F factory default settings restoring 6 4 FADER parameter 4 2 A 22 FORMAT parameter 3 63 3 64 A 22 FP button See remote control 2 16 FRONT L R parameter 3 26 3 28 3 30 3 34 front panel display 2 3 MC 12 2 2 MC 12 Balanced 2 4 overview 2 2 2 4 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu 3 65 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY parameter 3 61 FRONT RIGHT parameter 3 34 FRONT STEERING parameter 5 5 5 6 5 40 H highlights MC 12 1 4 high pass filter 3 23 horizontal bar graphs 2 12 INPUT BALANCE parameter 5 12 5 40 input connectors digital audio 2 7 IR 2 10 microphone 2 10 video 2 9 INPUT NAME menu 3 5 INPUT parameter 2 21 2 23 2 24 2 26 INPUT SELECT parameter 3 15 3 17 A 20 input selection buttons 2 5 Record Zone 2 5 Zone 2 2 5 INPUT SETUP menu 3 2 3 4 A 20 INPUT TYPE parameter 2 21 2 24 2 26 INPUTS changing names 3 5 configuring 3 15 Main Zone 2 5 3 2 Record Zone 3 2 installation considerations 1 5 12 Index
124. SS parameter is set to OFF analog audio sources Level meters appear in combinations of green yellow and red when the on screen display is configured for a blue screen background Green indicates low levels yellow indicates normal levels and red indicates the onset of overload Occasional flashes from yellow into red are normal peak indicators Level meters appear in white when the on screen display is not configured for a blue screen background 3 10 12 Setup VIDEO IN COMPOSITE 1 TO 5 S VIDEO 1 TO 8 NONE Exc gt DO gt Opens the VIDEO IN menu to assign a composite or S video input connector for the selected input Note e Composite video output connectors are available only when composite video source is present e S video output connectors are available when an S video or Com posite source is present MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS INPUT SETUP DVD1 VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION COMPONENT IN Ed gt Ld gt Bul gt EZ Opens the COMPONENT IN menu to assign a component video input connector for the selected input COMPONENT 1 to 4 Note Component video output connectors are only available when a component video source is present DVD1 VIDEO IN COMPOSITE 1 COMPOSITE 2 COMPOSITE 3 COMPOSITE 4 COMPOSITE 5 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 2 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 4 S VIDEO 5
125. SUB MONO SUB RIGHT LFE SET LEVELS AUTO LEVELS ORIGINAL LEVELS FA D 0 0dB 0 0dB Y 0 048 lt 0 048 0 0dB 0 00B R SL RL 0 0dB ORIGINAL LEVELS APPLIED gt AUTO SPEAKER SETUP CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR amp 1 4l I I I I I il i il il i lt SIT QUIETLY PRESS TO BEGIN COUNTDOWN and v AUTO LEVELS FRONT LEFT ERROR CENTER 0 00B FRONT RIGHT 0 00B SIDE RIGHT 0 00B REAR RIGHT 0 00B REAR LEFT 0 00B SIDE LEFT 0 00B SUB MONO 0 00B SUB RIGHT LFE AUTO LEVELS APPLIED AUTO SPEAKER SETUP TEST WILL BEGIN IN 10 PRESS SKIP COUNTDOWN The AUTO LEVELS screen shown below indicates the individual calibration results for each speaker Press the arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker calibration parameter Then press the 4 arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker SPEAKER SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH SPEAKER SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW SPEAKER OK SPEAKER SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED A 12 12 Appendix MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES FRONT LEFT CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT SUB MONO SUB RIGHT LFE UNITS SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTR
126. Settings MID RT 1 84s 115ms to 15 4s BASS RT 2 765 23ms to 30 8ms ROLLOFF 2 4kHz 500Hz to 20kHz TREB CUT RT 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz PRE DELAY 18ms 10ms to 100ms ADVANCED CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 LIVE MED ADVANCED parameter settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings REVERB LVL AdB 80dB to 0dB EARLY RFLX LVL 14dB 80dB to 12dB BASS XOVER 156Hz 30Hz to 19 9kHz OFF LIVE MED ADVANCED parameter settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings SHAPE 2 0 to 4 SPREAD 25 0 to 100 SIZE 30m 4m to 60m LIVE LARGE parameter settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings MID RT 4 71s 115ms to 30 8s BASS RT 4 71s 23ms to 30 8ms ROLLOFF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz TREB CUT RT 2 4kHz 500Hz to 20kHz PRE DELAY 20ms 10ms to 100ms ADVANCED CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 LIVE LARGE ADVANCED parameter settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings REVERB LVL 6dB 80dB to 0dB EARLY RFLX LVL 17dB 80dB to 12dB BASS XOVER 156Hz 30Hz to 19 9kHz OFF SHAPE 2 0 to 4 SPREAD 28 0 to 100 SIZE 38m 4m to 60m See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 34 12 Mode Adjust OUTPUT LEVELS OUTPUT LEVELS Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu which is eT used to adjust output levels for the Main SIDE L R Zone audio output connectors labeled REAR L R Center Subwoofer
127. TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION EDIT INPUT NAME DIENEN Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME editing menu to customize the name of the selected input Custom input names can include up to eight characters To customize the name of the selected input 1 Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path to open the EDIT INPUT NAME editing menu DVD1 INPUT SETUP gt DVD1 INPUT NAME NAME DVD1 EDIT INPUT NAME DIGITAL IN COAX 1 RESTORE DEFAULT NAME ANALOG IN NONE t 4 BUTTONS TO EDIT ANLG IN LVL AUTO UP TO 8 CHARACTERS VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 BUTTON TO ADVANCE COMPONENT IN 1 T z 191 FILM 000 5 1 122 FILM 5 1 7 FILM LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED gt EDIT INPUT NAME DVD1 INPUT SETUP RT 20 DVD1 2 When the editing menu opens the current input name appears on the second line Use the remote control a and arrow buttons to change the character above the cursor 3 When the character you want is displayed press the arrow button to advance to the next character space The cursor will automatically wrap to the first character space when the last character space is passed 3 5 Setup Lexicon CHANGING INPUT NAMES continued INPUT SETUP Note Pressing the arrow button closes the menu and returns to the INPUT NAME menu 4 Repeat step 3 to enter all characters in the new name Wh
128. UT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 r MUSIC VOCAL ENHANCE 0 00 FRONT STEERING MUSIC RE EQUALIZER OFF SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 00B OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM THX RE EQUALIZER ON SURROUND EX AUTO COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM Taz MUSIC COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 00B OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 MOV EX DECODING AUTO COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 40 048 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 MUS EX DECODING AUTO COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM OO DIGITAL EX DECODING AUTO COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 0 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 2 CHANNEL CENTER MIX 0dB SURROUND MIX 0dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES 0 MASTER LEVEL 0dB COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 00 SUB L R LVL 00 CUSTOM 5 1 MONO LOGIC EFFECT LVL 9dB ACADEMY FILTER ON SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 MONO SURR OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 MONO SUB L R LVL CUSTOM VOCAL ENHANCE 0 00 FRONT STEERING FILM RE EQUALIZER ON SOUND STAGE REAR 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms LFE MIX 0 00B ies DECODING AUTO OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM dies VOCAL ENHANCE 0 00 FRONT STEERING MUSIC RE EQUALIZER OFF SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms LFE MIX 0 00 DECODING AUTO O
129. UTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM dits EC ES RE EQUALIZER ON LFE MIX 0 0 ies DECODING AUTO OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM EMEX MUSIC LFE MIX 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM LFE MIX 0 00 DECODING AUTO OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 4 CENTER MIX 00 SURROUND MIX 0dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES 0 MASTER LEVEL 00 LFE MIX 0 0dB ies DECODING AUTO SUB L R LVL 00 CUSTOM 5 1a rz FILM VOCAL ENHANCE 0 00 FRONT STEERING FILM RE EQUALIZER ON SOUND STAGE REAR 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 00 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1a rs MUSIC VOCALENHANCE 0 00B FRONT STEERING MUSIC RE EQUALIZER OFF SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 00 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1a IHX RE EQUALIZER ON SURROUND EX OFF LFE MIX 0 00B OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1a THX MUSIC LFE MIX 0 00 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 STANDARD OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 2 CHANNEL CENTER MIX 00 SURROUND MIX 008 CNTR DLY SAMPLES 0 MASTER LEVEL 0dB LFE MIX 0 0dB SUB L R LVL 0dB CUSTOM 5 1a BYPASS OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 2CH BYPASS NO PARAMETERS LIVE LARGE ADVANCED REVERB LVL 6dB EARLY RFLX LVL 17dB BASS XOVER 156Hz SPREAD 28 SIZE 38m LIVE SMALL MID RT BASS RT ROLLOFF TREB CUT RT PRE DELAY ADVANCED CUSTOM LIVE SMAL
130. Usethe MC 12 configuration tool to download the current MC 12 configuration to a personal computer PC or docu ment all user defined settings on the installation worksheet that begins on page A 20 Then follow the instructions on the next page to restore factory default settings If all else fails 1 Set the rear panel power switch to the off position Wait 10 seconds Then set the rear panel power switch to the on position 2 Usethe MC 12 configuration tool to download the current MC 12 configuration to a personal computer PC or docu ment all user defined settings on the installation worksheet that begins on page A 20 Then follow the instructions on page 6 4 to restore factory default settings Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer 4 Contact Lexicon customer service at 781 280 0300 or www lexicon com Note Visit the knowledgebase at http www lexicon com kbase for answers to frequently asked questions and additional trouble shooting information ROUTINE MAINTENANCE The bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that should be performed on a periodic basis Clean the MC 12 exterior surface with a soft lint free cloth Do not use alcohol benzene acetone based cleaners or strong commercial cleaners Do not use a cloth made with steel wool or metal polish If the MC 12 is exposed to a dusty environ ment a low pressure blower can be used to remove dust from its exterior surfac
131. a BYPASS status menu 2 22 2 23 5 1a L7 FILM listening mode 5 4 5 28 5 1a L7 MUSIC listening mode 5 4 5 29 5 1a parameter 3 12 3 14 5 3 A 20 5 1a STANDARD listening mode 5 31 5 1a THX listening mode 5 4 5 30 5 1a THX MUSIC listening mode 5 31 5 1a THX SurEX listening mode 5 30 5 1a THX ULTRA2 listening mode 5 30 5 1 channel analog audio input connectors 2 7 7 5 button 2 17 3 32 8 STEREO INPUTS option 3 59 A 21 A A V SYNC DELAY parameter 3 61 A 22 about the MC 12 1 2 AC input connector 2 7 ACADEMY FILTER parameter 5 15 5 23 5 37 advanced speaker array 3 32 ANALOB BYPASS parameter 3 15 analog audio input connectors 2 7 ANALOG BYPASS parameter 3 16 A 20 ANALOG IN parameter 3 7 3 8 20 anamorphic trigger signals 3 16 ANLG IN LVL parameter 3 7 3 9 3 20 arrow buttons 2 17 ASA parameter 3 26 assigning input connectors 3 7 AUDIO CNTRL parameter 3 70 A 21 AUDIO CONTROLS menu 4 2 A 22 audio input connectors 5 1 channel analog 2 7 analog 2 7 audio input to output connector table 2 7 audio output connectors balanced 2 9 main zone 2 7 record zone analog 2 9 record zone digital 2 9 zone 2 2 7 AUTO AZIMUTH parameter 5 5 5 37 AUTO DISTANCES 3 49 AUTO GAIN parameter 3 9 3 10 AUTO LEVELS 3 49 AUTO parameter 3 9 3 10 AUTO SPEAKER SETUP screens 3 47 Automatic Calibration 3 35 Index B BACKGROUND parameter 3 18 3 63 3 64 A 22 BALANCE parameter 4 2 4 7 A 22
132. a composite and S video switcher accepts high quality NTSC PAL or SECAM video signals The component video switcher can pass High Definition TV HDTV signals and Standard Definition TV signals Both switchers are designed to pass video signals without alteration or degradation An unparalleled processor the MC 12 conveys the best in music and cinema with awesome power and leading edge technological sophistication Even the most demanding enthusiasts will be impressed with its exceptional performance The MC 12 is a must have addition for any high quality home theater 1 3 Getting Started Lexicon HIGHLIGHTS 12 channels 12 configurable inputs 3 independent zones 13 digital audio input connectors including 6 S PDIF coaxial 6 S PDIF optical and 1 AES EBU 5 1 channel analog audio input connector Analog bypass option for stereo and 5 1 channel analog audio input connectors Auto switching between digital and analog audio input connectors 24 bit 192kHz D A converters for all Main Zone audio channels Stereo subwoofer and LFE output connectors Automatic and manual calibration of speaker distances and output levels 4 component video input connectors with full HDTV compatibility BNC component video input and output connectors 8 S video input connectors 5 composite video input connectors Broadcast quality video switching Four 32 bit DSP engines Separate DSP engine for decoding compressed audio
133. able of Contents Documentation Conventions sese ii Important Safety Instructions sese v Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise esee v Instrucciones De Seguridad vi Instructions Importantes Relatives La 5 vi Importanti Norme Di Sicurezza esses eee vii Instru es Importantes De vii Information Om Sikkerhed seen viii T rkeit Turvallisuusohjeita eese viii Viktig Informasjon Om Sikkerhet ix Viktiga lt ix Unpacking and 1 x Auspacken und berpr fung x Desembalaje e Inspecci n esee eene eren x Contenu de L emballage et Inspection x Disimballaggio ed Ispezione eese x Retirando Embalagem e x Getting Started About Thie MG 12 ii rt reise 1 2 Highlights en anda Eee 1 4 Product Registration eese 1 5 Installation Considerations eee 1 5 Remote Control Battery Installation 1 6 Basic O
134. al noise test but there is no need to do so LEVELS CALIBRATION INTERNAL NOISE TEST EXTERNAL NOISE TEST BASS PEAK LIMITERS INTERNAL NOISE CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS gt SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST FRONT LEFT 0 00B CENTER 0 00B 1 FRONT RIGHT 0 00B SIDE RIGHT 0 00B REAR RIGHT 0 00B REAR LEFT 0 00B SIDE LEFT 0 00B MONO SUB 0 00B SUB RIGHT 0 00B LFE LM UNITS wi a 0 0dB 0 048 18 0 to 12 0dB 3 54 12 INTERNAL NOISE TEST EX c IE E EXIT c LEVELS CALIBRATION 5 INTERNAL NOISE TEST Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown on the previous page which indicates that the internal noise test generates loud calibration noise signals When the INTERNAL NOISE message opens e Press the arrow button to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on the previous page When the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu opens the internal noise test automatically begins e Press the 4 button to skip the internal noise test During the internal noise test the MC 12 sends calibration noise signals to each speaker in the order shown on the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu The cursor automatically scrolls through output level parameters highlighting each parameter as the MC 12 sends the calibration noise signal to the corresponding speaker The calibration noise signal is sent to each speaker for about 4 seconds Note When the internal nois
135. alibrated value could be inac curate Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3 42 to 3 46 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration SPEAKER SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH The microphones detected calibration noise signals at an unusually high level Decrease associated amplifier volume levels including if applicable powered subwoofer amplifiers The microphones may be positioned too close within 2 feet 0 61m of the selected speaker Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3 42 to 3 46 to confirm that the micro phones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration SPEAKER SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW The microphones detected calibration noise signals at an unusually low level Increase associated amplifier volume levels including if applicable powered subwoofer amplifiers The microphones may be positioned too far away more than 30 feet 9 14m from the selected speaker See the microphone placement examples on pages 3 42 to 3 46 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration 3 51 Setup Lexicon MANUAL CALIBRATION Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu MANUAL option displays the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu to manually calibrate speaker distances and output levels The table below indicates available manual calibration options MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTR
136. an be adjusted Note the following e When the MODES parameter is set to LOCKED the up and down arrows can still be used to adjust subwoofer output levels applied to the selected listening mode when the Shift command bank is activated e When the SETUP parameter is set to LOCKED the 2CH button can still be used to adjust the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter setting when the Shift command bank is activated e When the SETUP parameter is set to LOCKED the 7 5 button can still be used to adjust the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter setting when the Shift command bank is activated 3 70 12 LIVE CALIBRATION EX LIVE Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment is a proprietary mode designed to transform the way your listening room sounds LIVE uses a combination of microphones and digital signal processing DSP to enhance the room acoustics and create the illusion of a larger more reverberant listening space Use LIVE to create a pleasing environment to practice or perform with a musical instrument or to create a livelier ambience for any social activity LIVE CALIBRATION must be completed before using any of the LIVE modes Notes You should run automatic calibration before running LIVE CALIBRATION See page 3 35 for instructions on running an automatic calibration Any changes to the LEVELS CALIBRATION or CROSSOVER SETUP in the SPEAKER SETUP menu will cause LIVE to become uncalib
137. ank The command matrix that begins on the next page indicates the commands remote control buttons perform when each command bank is activated 2 Press a remote control button to send a command to the MC 12 The MAIN MENU SETUP DISPLAYS ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu REMOTE STATE parameter controls the remote control command bank indicator that appears on the on screen display When the REMOTE STATE parameter is set to ON a command bank indicator appears in the top right corner of the on screen display to indicate the last command bank from which the MC 12 received a command A Z appears when the Zone 2 command bank is active An R appears when Record Zone command bank is active An S appears when the Shift command bank is active No letter appears when the Main Zone command bank is active When the REMOTE STATE parameter is set to OFF no command bank indicator appears on the on screen display Note Remote control command bank selection buttons should not be pressed and held 2 13 Basic Operation Lexicon COMMAND MATRIX The command matrix describes the commands remote control buttons perform when each command bank is active Activates and deactivates standby mode when the MC 12 rear panel power switch is in the on position When standby mode is activated pressing the standby button deactivates standby mode and activates the MC 12 including all zones that were activated during the previous operating sess
138. ayback of 5 1 channel analog music sources It cannot be activated unless side and rear speakers are present This mode performs best in home theaters where the rear speakers are placed close together ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 32 for more information Option Parameter Default Setting LFE MIX 0 0 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM Possible Settings 10 0 to 0 0dB Refer to page 5 35 Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions Note The 5 1a THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the front panel or remote control Mode buttons 5 1a STANDARD LX BEN This mode allows 5 1 channel analog sources to use bass management speaker crossovers speaker distance calibration and audio controls tone controls When these features are not used the 5 1a STANDARD listening mode is similar to the 5 1a BYPASS listening mode The 5 1a STANDARD mode sends identical signals with appropriate time delays to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Side L and Rear L as well as Side R and Rear R Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions Mode Adjust Lexicon 5 1a 2 CHANNEL MODE ADJUST fo 512 2 CHANNEL This
139. cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for DTS ES sources 5 1a LL Opens the 5 1a MODE menu which selects a preferred listening mode for 5 1 channel analog input sources The MC 12 automati cally activates the preferred listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new 5 1 channel analog source is present When the 5 1a parameter is set to USE LAST The MC 12 uses the listening mode that was activated the last time a 5 1 channel analog source was present e The 5 1a THX MUSIC listening mode is used if this listening mode was activated the last time a 5 1 channel analog source was present Normally the 5 1a THX MUSIC listening mode cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 5 1 channel analog sources MIC Ex EL mi Opens the MIC MODE menu which selects a preferred listening mode for the LIVE source The MC 12 automatically activates the preferred listening mode when the ANALOG IN selection is LIVE When the MIC parameter is set to USE LAST e The MC 12 uses the listening mode that was activated the last time a MIC source was present 3 14 12 Setup CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS gt INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION The MC 12 allows the assignment of one digital and one analog
140. ce 1kHz THD Noise Below 0 00596 at 1kHz maximum output level Main Zone Audio Performance Dynamic Range 10548 minimum 1084dB typical 22kHz bandwidth Signal to Noise Ratio 105dB minimum 10848 typical 22kHz bandwidth A D Conversion e 24 bit 96kHz dual bit AX architecture Input Sensitivity 200mVrms 4Vrms for maximum output level D A Conversion 24 bit 44 1 to 192kHz multi bit AX architecture Input Impedance 100kQ in parallel with 150pF Frequency Response e 10Hz to 20kHz 0 1dB 0 25dB 0 75dB at 40kHZz refer ence 1kHz THD Noise Below 0 00396 at 1kHz maximum output level Dynamic Range 108dB minimum 11148 typical 22kHz bandwidth Output Level 200mVrms typical 4Vrms maximum RCA connectors 400mVrms typical 8Vrms maximum XLR connectors Zone 2 only MC 12 Balanced only Maximum value with full scale input signal and volume at OdB Signal to Noise Ratio e 108dB minimum 111dB typical 22kHz bandwidth Input Sensitivity e 200mVrms 2Vrms for maximum output level at OdB input gain Output Impedance 1000 in parallel with 150pF RCA connectors 50 in parallel with 150pF XLR connectors Zone 2 only MC 12 Balanced only Input Impedance 100kQ in parallel with 150pF A 2 12 Appendix Video Input amp Output Connectors Video Inputs 5 composite RC
141. check position the microphones V As close together as possible V Relatively centered between and equidistant from the front left and right speakers 4 Ina clear line of sight path with the speakers V n a location unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals v At least 2 feet 0 61m from all speakers and walls but within 30 feet 9 14m of all speakers The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement during the microphone check All of the microphones are positioned as close together as possible in an unobstructed location that is v equidistant from the front left and right speakers Microphone Center Subwoofer Front Right Setup Lexicon P RO P E R microphone positioning for the microphone check During the microphone check do not X Separate the microphones X Scatter the microphones throughout the listening space X Obstruct the line of sight path between the micro phones and the speakers X Position the microphones on the floor on seat cushions or in locations obstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes might obscure calibration noise signals X Position the microphones within 2 feet 0 61m of speakers and walls or more than 30 feet 9 14m from any one speaker The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement during
142. ctivates the most appropriate listening mode for the current Main Zone input source For example pressing the L7 button while a 2 channel source is present in the Main Zone activates the L7 FILM listening mode The table below indicates the listening modes associated with each mode family selection button Input Source Button 2 Channel 5 1 Dolby Digital DTS ES 5 1a Channel Analog DOLBY PLIIx THX DTS ES THX 5 1a THX DOLBY PLIIx MOVIE Dolby DIGITAL N A N A olby DIG L7 FILM 5 1 L7 FILM DTS ES L7 FILM 5 1a L7 FILM L7 TV 5 1 L7 TV N A N A DTS Neo 6 CIN N A DTS ES N A amp L7 MUSIC 5 1 L7 MUSIC DTS ES L7 MUSIC 5 1a L7 MUSIC These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source speaker setup and parameter settings Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section that begins on the next page for more information The MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE message appears on the on screen and front panel displays when the selected listening mode family does not offer a listening mode for the current Main Zone input source When a 7 speaker configuration is in use the DPLIIx variant of this mode is loaded Tt The MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE message appears on the on screen and front panel displays if the input has a sampling rate of 96kHz This includes analog inputs converted to 96kHz 5 4 12 Mode Adjust LISTENING M
143. d front panel displays restore audio video synchronization and create and activate a custom unit name See DISPLAY SETUP on page 3 61 for more information VOLUME CONTROLS Eme Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu to configure Main Zone Zone 2 and Record Zone volume levels See VOLUME CONTROL SETUP on page 3 66 for more information TRIGGERS Ei gt EI Prompts the selection of a desired trigger output connector 1 or 2 and opens the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu for configu ration of remote or program operation See TRIGGER SETUP on page 3 68 for more information MC 12 Setup LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION EX EET EX c BENZ Opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu to protect MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP menu branch settings from accidental changes See LOCK OPTIONS on page 3 70 for more information Opens the LIVE CALIBRATION menu to perform the necessary calibration before using the LIVE modes See LIVE Calibration on page 3 71 for more information 3 3 S etup Lexicon INPUT SETUP Eid DOS gt Kul gt EE Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of a desired input e g DVD1 Selecting an input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu which changes input names assigns audio and video input connectors selects preferred listening modes and configures advanced Main Zone Zone 2 and Record Zone settings MAIN MENU SETUP INPUT SETUP gt DVD1 INPUT SETUP MODE
144. d 1 when the connector is configured for remote operation Activates and deactivates the trigger output connector labeled 2 when the connector is configured for remote operation Activates and deactivates standby mode when the MC 12 is powered on with the rear panel power switch Increases and decreases Main Zone volume level in 1dB increments Increases and decreases Zone 2 volume level in 1dB increments Increases and decreases Record Zone volume level in 1dB increments Increases and decreases Main Zone volume level in 1dB increments Toggles between lowering Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume to the original level Toggles between full Zone 2 muting and unmuting Zone 2 volume to the original level Toggles between full Record Zone muting and unmuting Record Zone volume to the original level Toggles between full Main Zone muting and unmuting Main Zone volume to the original level 2 16 12 Basic Operation a gt OLD 11 Displays the Main Zone two line status for 2 seconds Displays the Zone 2 two line status for 2 seconds Displays the Record Zone two line status for 2 seconds Opens and closes the status menu for the current input source 12 qa When a menu is open pressing the MENU button closes the structure When no menus are open pressing the MENU butto
145. d Fix passes audio at fixed output levels The connector labeled Var passes audio at variable output levels and includes a built in volume control Two S PDIF connectors one coaxial and one optical are available for digital audio output Alternatively these connectors can be used to connect a recording device When the Record Zone audio output connector labeled Var is sent to a recording device you should set the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu REC PWR ON parameter to 0dB to achieve appropriate recording levels The Record Zone audio output connector labeled Var passes audio at variable output levels Adjusting Record Zone volume level will affect the recording 8 BALANCED AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS MC 12 BALANCED Provide balanced analog audio output in the Main Zone and Zone 2 Ten connectors labeled Front L R Center LFE Subwoofer L R Side L R and Rear L R are available in the Main Zone The connectors labeled Aux L R are provided for future expansion Two connectors labeled Zone 2 L R are available in Zone 2 9 VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS Provide video input in the Main and Record Zones Five composite video connectors labeled Video 1 to 5 eight S video connectors labeled S Video 1 to 8 and four component video connectors three RCA and one BNC labeled INPUT 1 to 4 are available The component video connectors are not available for the Record Zone 10 MAIN VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide video output in the Main Zone Two composite v
146. d Lexicon dealer Do select a dry well ventilated location out of direct sunlight Do Nor expose the MC 12 to high temperatures humidity steam smoke dampness or excessive dust Avoid installing the MC 12 near radiators and other heat producing appliances Do Nor install the MC 12 near unshielded TV or FM antennas cable TV decoders or other RF emitting devices that might cause interference Do Nor place the MC 12 on a thick rug or carpet or cover the MC 12 with a cloth as this might prevent proper cooling Do NOT place the MC 12 on a windowsill or any location exposed to direct sunlight Do NOT obstruct the front panel IR receiver window The remote control must be in line of sight with the IR receiver for proper operation Do NOT install the MC 12 on a surface that is unstable or unable to support all four feet unless it is installed in an equipment rack Do stack the MC 12 directly above heat producing equipment such as a power amplifier CAUTION Before moving the MC 12 power the unit off using the rear panel power switch and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 1 5 Getting Started Lexicon REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION The remote control requires two AA batteries The batteries should be replaced as needed Alkaline batteries which last longer without leaking are recommended When battery power is low the remote control enters a low voltage condition preventing it from operating t
147. d by the original pur chaser and subsequent owners during the warranty period provided the original dated sales receipt or other proof of warranty coverage is presented at time of service What is Covered This warranty covers all defects in material and workmanship on this product except as specified below The following are not covered 1 Damage resulting from Accident misuse abuse or neglect Failure to follow instructions contained in the user guide Repair or attempted repair unauthorized by Harman Specialty Group Failure to perform recommended periodic maintenance Causes other than product defects including lack of skill competence or experience on the part of the owner Damage occurring during any shipment of this product Claims for shipping damages must be made with the carrier Damage to a unit that has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced modi fied or removed exicon H A Harman International Company What Expenses will Harman Specialty Group Assume Harman Specialty Group will pay all labor and material expenses for covered items Payment of shipping charges is discussed in the next section of the warranty How is Service Obtained When this product needs service write telephone or fax Harman Specialty Group to request information about where the unit should be taken or sent When making a written request please include your name complete address and daytime telephon
148. d in the speaker setup this parameter is labeled MONO SUB When two subwoofers are included in the speaker setup this parameter is labeled SUB LEFT t When a speaker is not included in the speaker setup the corresponding speaker distance or output level parameter is not available N A 3 34 12 AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION The MC 12 offers automatic calibration of speaker distances output levels or both The table below indicates available automatic calibration options A successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed Automatic Options Details microphone levels MICROPHONE CHECK e Confirms that the microphones are properly connected and functioning e Calculates an average level for the microphones connected to the microphone input connectors allowing the MC 12 to compensate for individual microphone sensitivities during automatic calibration e Ensures that microphone levels are consistent eliminating automatic calibration errors from individual and output levels position and the speaker levels within 3 0dB of THX reference levels 75dB DISTANCES amp LEVELS e Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances and output levels e Offers accurate calibration with minimal interaction automatically applying calibrated speaker distances e Calibrates speaker distances within 0 5 foot 2m of the physical distance between the primary listening
149. d rear speakers are present and THX Surround EX decoding is engaged THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source with THX Surround EX encoding is detected The THX listening mode is available when both Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding are deactivated Note Some EX encoded sources are not flagged and require manually setting the SURROUND EX parameter to ON for EX decoding When THX Ultra2 decoding is active e Adaptive de correlation is applied to increase the perceived width of the listening space De correlation of the mono surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround field in home theaters Input Source Parameter Setting 5 1 Channel Dolby Digital 5 1 Channel THX Surround EX Dolby Digital Flagged 5 1 Channel THX Surround EX Dolby Digital Non Flagged SURROUND EX AUTO THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX THX ULTRA2 SURROUND EX ON THX SurEX THX SurEX THX SurEX SURROUND EX OFF THX ULTRA2 THX ULTRA2 THX ULTRA2 5 18 12 Mode Adjust e ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 32 for more information When THX Surround EX decoding is active Matrix decoding is applied to derive three surround channels from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings
150. des amplificateurs de puissance aux connecteurs de l appareil Afin d viter tout risque d lectrocution ou d incendie n exposez pas l appareil la pluie ou l humidit ne l utilisez pas dans des endroits expos s aux projections de liquides N essayez pas d utiliser l appareil si celui ci est tomb a t endommag expos des projections de liquides ou si vous constatez des dysfonctionnements n cessi tant l intervention d un technicien sp cialis Cet appareil ne doit tre ouvert que par un personnel de service qualifi En enle vant les couvercles vous vous exposez des tensions lectriques dangereuses de constituer un risque d lectrocution Le point d exclamation dans un triangle quilat ral sert alerter l utilisateur sur la pr sence de nombreuses instructions de maintenance dans le manuel fourni avec l appareil Le symbole de clair fl ch dans un triangle quilat ral sert alerter l utilisateur AN sur la pr sence l int rieur de l appareil de tensions non isol es susceptibles 12 Introduction ITALIANO IMPORTANTI NORME DI SICUREZZA Conservare le presenti norme per l utilizzo futuro Seguire sempre tutte le istruzioni e gli avvertimenti segnati sull unit e nelle istruz ioni operative Utilizzare sempre la corretta tensione di alimentazione Fare riferimento al manuale del costruttore per le caratteristiche di alimentazione Tensioni di rete diverse necessitano anche di un diverso
151. dio output connectors This allows analog sources to use bass management speaker crossovers speaker distance calibration and tone controls Note When the Shift command bank is activated pressing the 2CH button toggles ANALOG BYPASS between ON and OFF S VIDEO 16 9 vimeo 16 9 Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some video sources When set to AUTO the MC 12 allows anamorphic video input signals to pass through the S video switcher enabling compatible display devices to automatically switch between anamorphic and non anamorphic display modes AUTO OFF When OFF the MC 12 prevents anamorphic video input signals from passing through the S video switcher preventing compatible display devices from automatically switching between anamorphic and non anamorphic display modes 3 16 12 INPUT SELECT PARAMETER SETTINGS DIGITAL ANALOG AUTO The MC 12 sends the digital audio from the assigned input to the Main Zone audio output connectors The assigned analog audio input connector is ignored The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM 44 1 48 88 2 and 96kHz Dolby Digital and DTS ES sources The digital audio input connectors are not compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources Note the following MC 12 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL when no analog audio input connector i
152. dix indicates factory default parameter settings Parameter Possible Settings ANLG IN LVL 18 to 12dB DIGITAL BYPASS ON OFF DIG OUT RATE INPUT 96kHz 88 2kHz 48kHz 44 1kHz RECORD BLOCKED ENABLED MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST gt SETUP gt INPUT SETUP INPUTS DVD1 AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS DVD2 SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION OJ imPurs OA ovo G recono anvancen Allows adjustment of analog audio input levels for input signals sent to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors Adjustments are applied to input signals before passing them to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors This parameter can be adjusted when an input source is present to prevent the internal A D converter from overloading DIGITAL BYPASS ON OFF Allows direct digital recording digital sources bypass sample rate conversion When ON digital input signals pass directly to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors preserving the original input signal sample rate When OFF the sample rate of the digital signals is converted then passed to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors The sample rate of the output signal then matches the sample rate of the recording device DIG OUT RATE parameter settings have no effect when the DIGITAL BYPASS parameter is set to ON DVD1 INPUT SETUP gt DVD1 RECORD ADV 18 to 1
153. e e Replace the remote control batteries as needed The remote control requires two AA batteries When these batteries are low on power the remote control enters a low voltage condition that prevents it from operating the MC 12 Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed 6 3 Troubleshooting amp Maintenance Lexicon RESTORING FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS When factory default settings are restored all parameters and user defined values are restored to their factory default settings Before restoring factory default settings you should record all user defined settings FACTORY SETTINGS gt En HAVE BEEN RESTORED V RESTORE DEFAULTS RESTART To restore factory default settings 1 Select one of the following options to record user defined settings e Use the Configuration Tool to download current MC 12 set tings to a personal computer PC The configuration tool is available at www lexicon com mc1 2 downloads asp e Record user defined settings on the installation worksheet that begins on page A 20 2 If applicable press the Standby Button to activate standby mode 3 When standby mode is activated press the Standby Button to deactivate standby mode 4 After the Standby Button is pressed quickly press and hold the Mute button until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu shown above opens on the on screen and front panel displays Note The Mute butto
154. e LEVELS option opens the AUTO LEV A DISTANCES ELS screen shown below idi OK The AUTO DISTANCES and AUTO LEVELS screens AUTO LEVELS SPEAKER AUTO DISTANCES gt SPEAKER shown at the right indicate the individual calibra FRONT LEFT ERROR SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH FRONT LEFT ERROR SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE tion results for each speaker Press the CENTER CENTER 0 0ft arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker cali BE SPEAKER FRONT RIGHT 0 0ft SPEAKER bration parameter Then press the arrow but 1 SEKR OUTPUT OO EOW SIDE RIGHT 0 0ft SIGNAL TOO LOW ton to view more detailed results for the selected 15 REAR RIGHT 0 0ft speaker ee REAR LEFT REAR LEFT 0 0ft SPEAKER L SIDE LEFT SIDE LEFT 0 0ft UNABLE TO CALCULATE ea SUB MONO SUB MONO 0 0ft Press the lt arrow button to return to the AUTO L_ SUB RIGHT SUB RIGHT ME SPEAKER SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown above right _ LFE MAY NOT BE ACCURATE Then press the arrow button to select the other i i i i calibration procedure or press the the 4 arrow SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER button to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu OK SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED OK SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED Appendix Lexicon MENU TREE continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP SETTING DISTANCES FRONT LEFT CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT SUB MO
155. e is present NIGHTCLUB The NIGHTCLUB mode is designed for playback of dry music sources that benefit from the addition of room reflections especially music sources that lack ambience in the recording The NIGHTCLUB mode generates early reflections and sends them to the front side and rear channels to simulate small intimate listening spaces The NIGHTCLUB mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from Lexicon professional products Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER DEPTH 11 0 to 18 SPEECH DETECT ON ON OFF SIZE 5m 4 to 20m LIVENESS 196ms 30ms to 20 2s PRE DELAY 5ms OFF 1 to 100ms ROLLOFF 9 0kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF EFFECT LVL 3dB 12 to 6dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 10 12 Mode Adjust CONCERT HALL 2 The CONCERT HALL mode generates early reflections and sends them to the front side and rear channels to simulate large listening spaces The CONCERT HALL mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from Lexicon professional products Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER DEPTH 12 0 to 18 SPEECH DETECT ON ON OFF SIZE 20m 4 to 20m LIVENESS 1 7
156. e microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit available at authorized Lexicon dealers Performing automatic calibration with microphones other than those in the kit will produce unpredictable results Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired automatic calibration results Pay particular attention to the microphone placement instructions and illustrations included in this section It is important to read and observe the care and handling docu mentation included with the Lexicon Microphone Kit to ensure optimal microphone performance Y MICROPHONE INPUTS 2 3 TRIGGER OUTPUTS Make sure the MC 12 is powered off OR in standby mode Connect the microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit to the microphone input connectors on the MC 12 rear panel as shown above Make sure the microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid connection During the microphone check the microphones will be referred to as 1 2 3 and 4 based on the input connector to which the microphone is connected You should label the microphones for troubleshooting purposes Power on the MC 12 OR deactivate standby mode 3 36 MC 12 Setup POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR THE MICROPHONE CHECK Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin below to position the microphones for the microphone check P RO P E R microphone positioning for the microphone check During the microphone
157. e number the product model and serial numbers and a descrip tion of the problem Do not return the unit to Harman Specialty Group without prior authorization When Shipping a Product for Service 1 Pay any initial shipping charges which are the responsibility of the owner If necessary repairs are covered by this warranty Harman Specialty Group will pay return shipping charges to any destination in the United States using the carrier of our choice Pack the unit securely strongly recommended Include a copy of the original dated sales receipt A copy of the original dated sales receipt must be presented whenever warranty service is required Do not include accessories such as power cords or user guides unless instructed to do so Package insurance is What are the Limitations of Warranties Any implied warranties including warranties of mer chantability and fitness for a particular purpose are limited in duration to the length of this warranty Implied Harman Specialty Group Tel 781 280 0300 3 Oak Park Fax 781 280 0490 Bedford MA 01730 1413 www lexicon com USA What Certain Damages are Excluded Harman Specialty Group s liability for a defective product is limited to repair or replacement of that product at our option Harman Specialty Group shall not be liable for damages based on inconvenience loss of use of the product loss of time interrupted operation commercial loss or any other damages wheth
158. e perceived width of the surround field in home theaters e ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 32 for more information The DTS ES THX listening mode The DTS ES THX listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and DTS ES decoding is active DTS ES decoding is activated when the ES DECODING parameter is set to AUTO the default or ON and a 5 1 channel matrix encoded or 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES source is detected The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior of the DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS ES THX modes when activated Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0 to 0 0dB ES DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detaileddescriptions 5 26 12 Mode Adjust Input Source i hannel DTS Matrix Encoded DTS ES Discrete Encoded DTS ES ES DECODING AUTO DTS THX UL2Cin DTS ES THX DTS ES THX ES DECODING ON DTS ES THX DTS ES THX DTS ES THX ES DECODING OFF DTS THX UL2Cin DTS THX UL2Cin DTS THX UL2Cin Er Tax MUSIC S EEE The DTS THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of 5 1 channel DTS music sources when th
159. e side and rear speakers are present ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 32 for more information This mode is recommended for home theaters with THX certified speaker setups Option Parameter Default Setting LFE MIX 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 Possible Settings 10 0 to 0 0dB See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions Note The DTS THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the front panel or remote control Mode buttons Ems amp Em ER o gd This mode decodes 5 1 matrix or 6 1 discrete channels from DTS ES sources It is designed for playback of 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES and 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES sources The six decoded main channels are full frequency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a limited frequency range of 120Hz The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup Refer to page 5 21 for more information Option Parameter Default Setting LFE MIX 0 0 ES DECODING AUTO OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 Possible Settings 10 0 to 0 0dB AUTO ON OFF See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Description
160. e test begins the MC 12 automatically sets volume level to 0 Avoid adjusting the master volume level while the test is in progress to achieve THX reference levels 75 To manually calibrate output levels during the internal noise test 1 Setthe SPL meter to C weighting and SLOW response 2 Press the a or v arrow button to highlight the desired output level parameter Then quickly press the button to select this output level parameter The horizontal bar graph shown on the previous page will open on the on screen display and automatic scrolling will stop Note During the internal noise test it is possible to select an output level parameter just as the cursor is about to automatically scroll to the next parameter causing the MC 12 to send the calibration noise signal to both speakers If this occurs reselect the desired speaker 3 When the horizontal bar graph opens press the 4 or v button to select the output level that achieves a 75dB SPL meter reading from the primary listening position 4 Press to close the parameter The internal noise test will continue and automatic scrolling will resume 5 Repeat steps 2 3 and 4 until all desired output levels have been set 3 55 Setup Lexicon EXTERNAL NOISE TEST Selecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu EXTERNAL NOISE TEST option opens the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on page 3 54 which manually calibrates output levels The external nois
161. e test requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc When the external noise test is conducted the MC 12 activates a listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source Refer to the table below for more information about external noise test listening mode activation When a listening mode is activated during the external noise test all custom listening mode menu parameter settings are ignored The listening mode is applied to the current Main Zone input source in its factory default condition When the external noise test is finished the listening mode returns to its custom condition INPUT SOURCE LISTENING MODE 2 Channel DaDo MOVIE DoDo PLIIx Dolby Digital DODIGITAL DTS ES z5 5 1 Channel Analog 5 1a STANDARD These listening modes depend on the speaker configuration Dolby Pro Logic MOVIE will only load when side and rear speakers are present These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source speaker setup and parameter settings Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section beginning on page 5 5 for more information Note When the external noise test begins the MC 12 automatically sets volume level to 0dB Avoid adjusting the master volume level while the test is in progress to achieve THX reference levels 75 To manually calibrate output levels during the external noise test
162. eactivate the LFE output connector LFE signals are redirected to the SUBWOOFER L R output connectors If the SUB L R parameter is set to OFF LFE signals are redirected to the speakers with the lowest crossover point 3 30 12 Setup EX e x ee THX ULTRA2 SUB ON OFF SETUP gt SPEAKERS gt SET CROSSOVERS KO CUSTOM SETUP ULTRA2 SUB When a THX speaker setup is selected the LFE information is redirected to the SUBWOOFER L R output connectors and the LFE parameter cannot or EG BGS ECES be adjusted Enables boundary gain compensation BGC for THX Ultra2 certified subwoofers MAIN MENU SETUP SPEAKER SETUP gt CROSSOVER SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS CUSTOM SETUP AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES THX SETUP SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG AUTOMATIC DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS ee TRIGGERS SET CROSSOVERS q PN P LOCK OPTIONS BEFORE CALIBRATING LIVE CALIBRATION 80Hz sts K wA aD 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz THX SPEAKER SETUP THX SETUP ON CUSTOM SETUP TTTHTTT FRONTL R THX 80Hz OFF FRONT L R 80Hz PRESSING THE CENTER THX 80Hz CENTER 80Hz BUTTON WILL SIDE L R THX 80Hz APART 1 SIDE L R 80Hz AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE REARL R 80Hz CLOSE REAR L R 80Hz 1 1 THE OUTPUTS TO A THX SUB L R MONO TOGETHER SUB L R MONO SPEAKER CONFIGURATION SUB XOVER THX 80Hz SUB XOVER 80Hz OFF LFE OFF THXULTRA2 SUB OFF THXULTRA2SU
163. een set release the input selection button Remote control input selection buttons cannot be used to select Zone 2 or Record Zone volume level adjustment even if the Zone 2 or Record Zone command bank is activated Basic Operation Lexicon FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW continued The MC 12 Balanced shown below has a larger chassis than the MC 12 shown on page 2 2 Otherwise they are identical DUDI DOD VOL 51 L7 FILM 30dB 5 MUTE BUTTON Press the Mute button to mute the MC 12 Main Zone volume level The VOLUME CONTROL SETUP and MUTE LEVEL parameter MUTE appears in the on screen and front panel displays Press can be used to set mute levels the Mute button again to restore the MC 12 volume to its original 2 4 12 Basic Operation Mute can be activated automatically or manually For example the MC 12 briefly activates mute when changing input sources or listening modes The amber LED in the Mute button lights whenever mute is activated 6 MODE AND BUTTONS Use the Mode buttons to scroll to the previous and next available listening mode Scrolling occurs in the order shown in the MODE ADJUST menu Press the Mode button to scroll upward through available listening modes Press the Mode v button to scroll downward through available listening modes 7 MAIN ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS Selects the input in the Main Zone When an input is selected a blue LED lights on the corresponding input
164. effektkrav M rkv l att andra matningssp nningar eventuellt kr ver att en annan typs n tsladd och eller kontakt anv nds Installera inte enheten i ett oventilerat stativ eller direkt ovanf r utrustningar som avger v rme t ex effektf rst rkare Se till att omgivningens temperatur vid drift inte verskrider det angivna v rdet i produktspecifikationen Beh llaren r f rsedd med h l och ppningar f r ventilering F r att garantera tillf rlitlig funktion och f rhindra verhettning f r dessa ppningar inte blockeras eller t ckas Inga f rem l f r skuffas in genom ventilationsh len Inga v tskor f r spillas p enheten Anslut aldrig audioeffektf rst rkarutg ngar direkt till n gon av enhetens kontakter F r att undvika elst t eller brandfara f r enheten inte uts ttas f r regn eller fukt eller anv ndas p st llen d r den blir v t Anv nd inte enheten om den har fallit i golvet skadats blivit v t eller om dess pre standa f r ndrats m rkbart vilket kr ver service Enheten f r ppnas endast av beh rig servicepersonal Farliga sp nningar blir tillg ngliga n r locken tas bort elst t f religger Denna triangel som visas p din komponent anger att viktiga bruksanvisn ingar och serviceanvisningar ing r i dokumentationen i fr ga Denna triangel som visas p din komponent varnar dig om en oisolerad far AN lig sp nning inne i enheten Denna sp nning r eventuellt s h g att
165. en the input name you want is displayed press the arrow button to close the menu and return to the INPUT NAME menu MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS DVD1 AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS DVD2 SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG LD DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS SAT TRIGGERS VCR LOCK OPTIONS cD LIVE CALIBRATION PVR GAME TAPE TUNER AUX RESTORE DEFAULT NAME e meurs 59 e RESTORE name Restores the factory default name of the selected input Factory default input names correspond to front panel and remote control input selection button labels The custom input name appears in the on screen and front panel displays Both the custom and factory default input names appear in the INPUT SETUP menu The custom input name appears against the left margin of the on screen display and the factory default input name appears in parentheses against the right margin gt DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DIGITAL IN ANALOG IN NONE gt DVD1 INPUT NAME EDIT INPUT NAME RESTORE DEFAULT NAME gt PRESS MENU TO RESTORE INPUT NAME DVD1 COAX 1 ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 1 Baf Ems 191 FILM 5 112 FILM des ERE IN 5 1a i FILM LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN RECORD IN RECORD ADVANCED DIGITAL DIGITAL To restore the factory default name of the selected input 1 Follow the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu path to open the INPUT NAME menu When the INPUT NA
166. ende utstyr som for eksempel kraftforsterkere Den maksimale romtempera turen som st r oppgitt i produktbeskrivelsen skal overholdes Apparatet er utstyrt med ventilasjons pninger For at apparatet skal v re p litelig i bruk og ikke veropphetes m disse pningene ikke blokkeres eller tildekkes Stikk aldri noe inn i ventilasjons pningene og pass at det aldri soles noen form for veeske apparatet Utgangsplugger fra audioforsterkere skal aldri koples direkte til apparatet brannfare og elektrisk stot ved sorge for at apparatet ikke utsettes for regn eller fuktighet og ikke anvendes i n rheten av vann Apparatet skal ikke brukes hvis det har blitt utsatt for stot er skadet eller v tt eller hvis endringer i ytelsen tyder at det trenger service Dette apparatet skal kun pnes av fagfolk Hvis dekselet fjernes utsettes man for livsfarlig hoyspenning Komponenten er merket med denne trekanten som er en advarsel om at det finnes uisolert farlig spenning inne i kabinettet hoy nok til a utgjore en fare for elektrisk stot Komponenten er merket med denne trekanten som betyr at den tilhorende litteraturen inneholder viktige opplysninger om drift og ved SVENSKA VIKTIGA S KERHETSF RESKRIFTER Spara dessa f reskrifter for framtida bruk F lj alla anvisningar och varningar som anges p enheten Anv nd alltid r tt n tsp nning Se tillverkarens bruksanvisningar f r information om
167. er incidental consequential or otherwise How do State Laws Relate to this Warranty Some states do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties and or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages As such the above limitations may not apply This warranty is not enforceable outside of North America This provides specific legal rights Additional rights may be provided by some states Customer Service Tel 781 280 0300 Fax 781 280 0495 Sales Fax 781 280 0499 Service PRODUCT REGISTRATION Please register this product within 15 days of purchase To do so complete and return this card or register online at www lexicon com Retain the sales receipt for proof of coverage lexicon Harman International Company C C Mrs Cc Ms C Miss lt Single c Married C Divorced lt gt Widowed First Name Last Name Company Title Mailing Address City State Zip Telephone Number Fax Number Email Address Product Model Purchase Date Version Serial Number Where did you purchase this product Age Education Household Income C Under 18 C High School C Under 20 000 C 18 24 College C 20 000 to 34 999 C 25 34 lt gt Graduate School 35 000 to 49 000 C 35 49 C Certificate 50 000 to 74 999 50 64 lt gt 75 000 to 99 000 65 lt 2 100 000 How did you learn about this product Choose C Friend C
168. es 2 CHAN 5 1a z MUSIC 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 5 1a BYPASS 2CH BYPASS LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE rz FILM AUTO AZIMUTH ON VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB RE EQUALIZER ON SOUND STAGE REAR 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15 5 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM iTV AUTO AZIMUTH ON VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB FRONT STEERING FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF SOUND STAGE REAR 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM MUSIC VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB FRONT STEERING MUSIC SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 121 MUSIC SURR VOCAL ENHANCE 0 00 FRONT STEERING MSURR SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM OO THX RE EQUALIZER OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM OO MOV OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM OO MUS PANORAMA OFF CTR WIDTH 3 DIMENSION NEUTRAL SURROUND 10ms OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM o0 PLII 1x RE EQUALIZER ON OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM Oo PLII MOVIE OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM OO PLII MUSIC PANORAMA OFF CTR WIDTH 3 DIMENSION NEUTRAL SURROUND DLY 10ms OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM OO PL RE EQUALIZER OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM DEI PRO LOGIC OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM RE EQUALIZER OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM dits CIN OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM
169. fara f r Introduction Lexicon j Unpacking and Inspection After unpacking the unit save all packing materials in case the unit ever needs to be shipped Thoroughly inspect the modules and packing materials for signs of damage Report any damage to the carrier at once report equipment malfunction to the dealer DE Auspacken und berpr fung Bewahren Sie nach dem Auspacken des Ger ts das Verpackungsmaterial f r den Fall auf dass Sie das Ger t wieder versenden m ssen berpr fen Sie die Module und die Verpackung sorgf ltig auf Anzeichen von Besch digung Etwaige Sch den sind dem Transporteur unverz glich anzuzeigen Funktionsst rungen sind dem zustandigen Handler zu melden j Desembalaje e Inspecci n Despu s de desembalar la unidad guarde todos los materiales de embalaje por si alguna vez transportar la unidad Inspeccione con atenci n los m dulos y los materiales de embalaje para comprobar que no muestren desperfectos Informe inmediatamente de cualquier desperfecto al transportista informe de cualquier problema de funcionamiento del equipo a su distribuidor Contenu de l emballage et Inspection Apr s avoir ouvert l emballage conservez le pour tout retour Inspectez avec soin les modules et les mat riaux d emballage pour tout signe de dommage Veuillez rapporter imm diatement les dommages aupr s du transporteur Les dysfonctionnements du mat riel doivent tre signal s votre
170. fer overload When the speaker setup does not include a subwoofer LFE information is mixed into speakers for which the corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menu parameter is set to FULL or to the lowest crossover points Available in all Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 all DTS modes and all 5 1a modes except 5 1a STANDARD and 5 1a BYPASS modes LISTENER POS Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered between the front left and right speakers Each increment within the 127 to 127 parameter range represents about one third of an inch Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5 12 for more information Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION mode 127 to 127 5 40 12 Mode Adjust Note The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend past the location of the front left and right speakers LIVENESS Depends on the SIZE parameter setting The LIVENESS parameter adjusts the amount of effect recirculation Higher settings mimic more reflective surfaces and increase decay time Available in NIGHTCLUB and CONCERT HALL modes 30ms to 20 2s LOW FREQ WIDTH Applies low frequency spatial correction to the input signal This correction is applied to uncorrelated input signals below 60Hz Available in PANORAMA mode 25 to 25dB MASTER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of 2 channel Logic 7 encoded sources Available in 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN
171. for remote operation the connector labeled 1 can be activated and deactivated with the MODE and buttons when the Zone 2 command bank is activated and the connector labeled 2 can be activated and deactivated with the MODE and buttons when the Record Zone command bank is activated Note When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to ON all TRIGGER SETUP menu program operation parameter settings are ignored PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETERS ON OFF Ex Ez e sz on En e Proram Operation Parameter Configures the selected trigger output connector for program operation when the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF Select the ON setting to associate the selected connector with the corre sponding input s or listening mode s When configured for program operation the connector is activated and deactivated when the associated inputs or listening modes are activated and deactivated Note the following e Connectors be associated with individual Main Zone inputs and listening modes as well as the Zone 2 and Record Zone inputs e Connectors cannot be associated with individual Zone 2 and Record Zone inputs Connectors can be associated with multiple inputs and listening modes at the same time Note When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu program operation parameter is automatically set to OFF
172. g mode menus when the listening mode does not accommodate multi channel output signals Available in all except LIVE modes OFF 30 to 12dB SURR ROLLOFF Applies high frequency attenuation control to the audio output connectors labeled Side L R and Rear L R This filter is only applied to output signals generated by the MC 12 Available in all Logic 7 modes 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF 5 43 Mode Adjust Lexicon LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION amp PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS continued SURROUND DLY Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the arrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers It is recom mended that you increase the setting when a greater sense of depth is desired in the listening space Available in DPLII MUSIC and DPLIIx MUSIC modes 0 to 15ms SURROUND EX Controls the THX Surround EX decoding feature which can be used to extract a rear channel from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources When ON is selected THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources When OFF is selected THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged for all 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources Available in THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX and THX modes When AUTO is selected THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when a flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source with THX Surround EX encoding is detected THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged when a non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source wit
173. g modes cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 2 channel sources Do D Hae Opens the Dolby DIGITAL MODE menu to select a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital input sources The MC 12 automatically activates the preferred listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new Dolby Digital source is present When the DOD parameter is set to USE LAST e The MC 12 automatically uses the Dolby Digital listening mode that was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present e If the 5 1 THX MUSIC listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present then the 5 1 THX MUSIC listening mode is used Normally the 5 1 THX MUSIC listening mode cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources Setup Lexicon SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES continued Ems ma gt Opens the DTS ES MODE menu which selects a preferred listening mode for DTS ES input sources The MC 12 automati cally activates the preferred listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new DTS ES source is present When the DTS ES parameter is set to USE LAST The MC 12 uses the listening mode that was activated the last time a DTS ES source was present DTS THX MUSIC listening mode is used if this listening mode was activated the last time a DTS ES source was present Normally the DTS THX MUSIC listening mode
174. gged Non Flagged EX DECODING AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EX DECODING ON DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EX EX DECODING OFF DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL 5 21 Mode Adjust Lexicon DO DIGITAL amp LX DIGITAL EX continued Lg e pm Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EX DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0 10 0 to 0 0 OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 1 2 CHANNEL mone ADAUST e 5 2 This mode recommended for recording purposes is designed for converting 5 1 channel Dolby Digital encoded input sources into 2 channel Logic 7 encoded output signals The downmixed 5 1 channel Dolby Digital input signals are sent to the front speakers and subwoofer Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER MIX 0dB 25 to 5dB SURROUND MIX 0dB 5 to 5dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES 0 127 to 127 MASTER LEVEL 0dB 5 to 5dB COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB 20 0 to 0 0dB SUB LEVEL 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 22 12 Mode Adjust 5 1 MONO LOG
175. gs from 30Hz to 120Hz The graph above does not curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz show the THX 80Hz crossover point which is 1 2dB per octave 3 24 12 Setup CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP SETUP SPEAKER SETUP INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES THX SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG AUTOMATIC DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS R SR RR TRIGGERS q N SET CROSSOVERS LOCK OPTIONS BEFORE CALIBRATING LIVE CALIBRATION K Q 80Hz Dati A wA pi 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz THX SPEAKER SETUPS Selecting CROSSOVER SETUP THX SETUP opens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen which indicates that pressing the arrow button will automatically configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup You should use THX certified speakers in a THX speaker setup When the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen opens e Press the arrow button to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup The THX SETUP menu will open on the on screen display e Press the 4 arrow button to close the message without config uring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP THX SETUP THX SPEAKER SETUP THX SETUP ICAUTION FRONT L R THX 80Hz PRESSING THE gt CENTER THX 80Hz BUTTON WILL SIDE L R THX 80Hz AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE REAR L R THX 80Hz THE OUTPUTS TO A THX SUB L R MONO SPEAKER SUB XOVER T
176. h or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected AUTO ON OFF Note The MC 12 cannot automatically detect THX Surround EX encoding in non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources A non flagged input source does not include information in the input signal that identifies THX Surround EX encoding THX Surround EX listening modes are available when Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged THX or THX ULTRA2 listening modes are available when THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged Refer to the 5 1 THX ULTRA2 5 1 THX SurEX amp 5 1 THX listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5 18 the DTS THX ULTRA2 amp DTS ES THX listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5 26 or the 5 1a THX ULTRA2 5 1a THX SurEX amp 5 1a THX listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5 29 for more information Note the following The SURROUND EX parameter AUTO setting is not available for the 5 1a THX listening modes e Toggling the SURROUND EX parameter setting produces low level clicks in the front speakers e THX Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present e When the Shift command bank is activated pressing the remote control THX button while a 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source is present activates the 5 1 THX ULTRA2 5 1 THX SurEX or 5 1 THX listening mode Subsequent presses adjust the SURROUND EX parameter cycling through the AUTO ON and OFF settings e When the Shift
177. hannel matrix encoded DTS ES or 6 1 channel DTS ES discrete encoded film sources DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS ES THX are recommended for home theaters with THX certified speakers These modes apply e THX re equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization e THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels which results in smoother sound movements between them The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the ES DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when when both side and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is activated To activate DTS THX UL2Cin decoding 1 Press MODE ADJUST gt FITM ss THX gt DECODING 2 Usethe or arrow to select either AUTO the default or OFF When the the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF the DTS ES THX ULTRA2 listening mode is always active When the parameter is set to AUTO the DTS ES THX ULTRA2 listening mode activates when a 5 1 channel DTS source is detected When THX UL2Cin decoding is activated e Adaptive de correlation is applied to increase the perceived width of the listening space De correlation of the mono surround channel increases th
178. he Record Zone For example if the DVD1 input is selected in the Main Zone the DVD1 input must also be selected in Zone 2 or the Record Zone e MAIN MENU gt SETUP gt INPUTS gt INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN or RECORD IN parameter is set to DMIX 3 When the MAIN MENU SETUP INPUTS INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN or RECORD IN parameter is set to ANLG the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors are not available during 5 1a BYPASS listening mode However it is possible to have a 5 1 channel analog audio source present in the Main Zone and a digital audio source present in Zone 2 or the Record Zone TWO LINE STATUS The two line status opens on the on screen and front panel displays whenever the MC 12 detects a status change such as a new input source or listening mode The information included on the two line status differs depending on the zone in which the MC 12 last detected a status change For example the Main Zone two line status opens when a Main Zone status change is detected MAIN ZONE TWO LINE STATUS Opens the on screen and front panel pev displays whenever the MC 12 detects a Main 340B Zone status change The Main Zone two line status indicates the current input listening mode input source and volume level selected in the Main Zone ZONE 2 TWO LINE STATUS Opens on the on screen and front panel displays whenever the MC 12 detects a Zone 73 340B 2 status change The Zone 2 two line
179. he Dolby PLIIx MOV MOVIE and Dolby PLII MOVIE listening modes are designed to playback 7 1 or 5 1 discrete channels decoded from 2 channel Dolby Surround encoded film sources The seven or five main channels are full frequency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a limited frequency range of up to 120Hz The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front side and rear speakers are present Note The MOV mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration Dolby PLII MOVIE and Dolby PLIIx MOV modes e Are designed for playback of Dolby Surround encoded sources e Provide impressive enhancement compared to Dolby Pro Logic decoding Dolby PLII MOVIE decodes five channels from Dolby Surround encoded sources Dolby PLIIx MOV decodes seven channels from Dolby Surround encoded sources Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 7 Mode Adjust Lexicon DOPLIIx MUS amp XIPLII MUSIC SEMI The Dolby PLIIx MUS MUSIC and Dolby PLII MUSIC listening modes are designed to playback 7 1 or 5 1 discrete channels decoded from 2 channel music sources The seven or five main channels are full frequency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a lim
180. he MC 12 When this occurs replace the batteries Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed To replace the remote control batteries Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control Press the tab and lift the cover away from the remote control Remove old batteries if applicable Observing the proper polarity insert two AA batteries Align the cover over the battery compartment and gently press down until it snaps back into place pn vo seu car em Dispose of the old batteries if applicable 1 6 Basic Operation Front Panel Overview UH EP ERE EE PEP EPA VERE RR 2 2 POPE EFE ERREUR Y 2 6 Remote Control Overview esee eene 2 10 Operation Considerations esses eere nnne 2 10 NERO OT TEES 2 11 Menu Navigation 2 11 Menu Item Selection nenne se rese nsns nnne 2 11 Command Bank Activation cesses eee ener 2 13 Command Matrix e sn eese 2 14 ABOUT the Zornes er 2 19 TwWo line Status HORE 2 19 Status Menus EE eor EUR npud Euri NEL 2 20 Status Menu Descriptions 2 21 Status Menu Parameter Descriptions
181. he Record Zone during the previous operating session MAX VOLUME 80 to 12dB Selects the maximum volume level for the Main Zone When value is selected the MC 12 automatically sets Main Zone volume level to the selected value 3 67 Setup Lexicon TRIGGER SETUP EX EX TRIGGER SETUP TRIGGER 1 REMOTE a TRIGGER 2 MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG d DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION The TRIGGERS option prompts you to select trigger output connector 1 or 2 The 12 includes three 12V DC trigger output connectors labeled PWR power 1 and 2 The PWR connector cannot be configured because its trigger output connector is activated and deactivated when the MC 12 is activated and deactivated or placed into standby The other connectors can be configured for remote or program operation Selecting TRIGGER 1 or TRIGGER 2 displays the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu to configure the selected trigger output connector The TRIGGER SETUP menu shown at the right is used as an example The parameters on the left side of the TRIGGER SETUP menus are identical regardless of whether TRIGGER 1 or TRIGGER 2 is selected The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable The TRIGGER SETUP menu indicates factory default parameter settings for both connectors Parameter Default Setting
182. hese proprietary Lexicon listening modes similar to the DTS ES L7 FILM listening mode use an advanced matrix to decode seven channels from 5 1 and 6 1 channel music sources with enhanced front steering to provide remarkable sound improvement compared to other decoders They are designed for enhanced playback of 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES or 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES music sources The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the ES DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0 6 0 3 0dB 0 0 FRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF ON OFF SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1 to 30ms LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0 to 0 0dB ES DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 25 Mode Adjust Lexicon Ermss THX amp rm THX UL2Cin XN eR e The DTS THX UL2Cin ULTRA2 CINEMA and DTS ES THX listening modes allow 7 channel playback of 5 1 channel DTS sources that lack DTS ES encoding They are designed for playback of 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 c
183. hone source is present When the parameter setting is an unknown digital audio source is present ANLG BYP PCM MIC MIX ROOM Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the mixing process When the parameter setting is LARGE you should set the RE EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for THX listening modes SMALL LARGE MODE Indicates the activated listening mode e g L7 FILM SAMPLE RATE Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz SURR MIX LVL Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during the mixing process 0 0 3 0dB 6 0dB WORD LENGTH 16 bits 20 bits 24 bits Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input signal STATUS MENU LEVEL METERS Most STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating input levels in the front left L center C front right R surround left SL surround right SR surround back SB and subwoofer SUB channels These level meters indicate input levels for both analog and digital input sources For example the level meters indicate digital audio input levels when a digital audio source is present Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS menu depending on the source that is present The SB level meter appears when a 6 1 channel source is present or when a 5 1 channel source is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON
184. ible in a single listening position allowing the MC 12 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for that position Subwoofer 3 42 12 RO P E R microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in a single row When calibrating for multiple listening positions in a single row position the microphones V At the approximate spot where the listener s head will be during listening 4 Ina clear line of sight path with the speakers V n a location unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals vV At least 2 feet 0 61m from all speakers and walls but within 30 feet 9 14m of all speakers The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement when calibrating for multiple listening positions in a single row Each micro phone is positioned in a single listening position within a single row allowing the MC 12 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for that row at the expense of a single listening position Front Right Subwoofer Center 3 43 Setu p Lexicon POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION continued P RO P E R microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in multiple rows When calibrating for multiple listening positions in mul
185. ice siempre la tension de linea correcta Consulte las instrucciones del fabri cante donde se especifican los requisitos de alimentaci n Tenga en cuenta que unas tensiones operativas diferentes pueden precisar de la utilizaci n de difer entes cables de alimentaci n y o enchufes No instale la unidad en un rack sin ventilaci n o directamente sobre equipos que generen calor como amplificadores de potencia Tenga en cuenta la temperatura operativa ambiental m xima que se detalla en las especificaciones del producto Las ranuras y aberturas del equipo son para su ventilaci n para garantizar un fun cionamiento fiable y evitar que la unidad se sobrecaliente no bloquee cubra o inserte objetos en las aberturas No derrame nunca l quidos de ning n tipo sobre la unidad Nunca conecte directamente salidas de amplificadores de potencia de audio a nin guno de los conectores de la unidad Para evitar descargas el ctricas o incendios no exponga la unidad a la humedad o la lluvia ni la utilice donde pueda estar expuesta al agua No intente utilizar la unidad si sta ha ca do se ha dafiado ha estado expuesta a l quidos o si muestra un cambio importante en sus prestaciones lo cual indicar a la necesidad de una reparaci n Das Esta unidad deber ser abierta nicamente por personal calificado Si usted quita las coberturas se expondr a voltajes peligrosos Este triangulo que aparece en su componente alerta de la presencia de
186. ideo connectors two S video connectors and one component video connector BNC are available The composite and S video connectors labeled 1 OSD incorporate the on screen display Note Composite video output connectors are available when a composite or 5 video source is present S video output connectors are available when an S video source is present Component video output connectors are available when a component video source is present 11 RECORD ZONE VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide video output in the Record Zone Two composite video connectors and two S video connectors are available Alternatively these connectors can be used to connect a video recording device 12 RS 232 CONNECTORS The RS 232 serial connector 1 is used to perform backup and restoration of configuration files and flash memory software upgrades The RS 232 connector 2 is capable of supporting future developments 2 9 Basic Operation Lexicon REAR PANEL OVERVIEW continued 13 TRIGGER OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide 12V DC output to control connected components Three trigger output connectors are available on a removable terminal block The PWR connector the power trigger output connector is not configurable It is activated when the MC 12 is activated and deacti vated when the MC 12 is deactivated The trigger output connectors 1 and 2 can be configured for remote or program operation 14 IR IN CONNECTOR Accepts
187. ime offset of the center channel Set this parameter to 0 unless the center channel is not properly timed and the value of the error is known Available in 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN and 5 1a 2 CHANNEL modes 127 to 127 COMPRESSION Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialog intelligibility at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input sources When ON full compression is applied regardless of volume level When OFF compression is not applied Set this parameter to AUTO or ON for AUTO ON OFF Dolby Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels especially for nighttime viewing to avoid disturbing others Available in all Dolby Digital modes CTR WIDTH Adjusts the center image When set to MIN the center image is heard from just the center speaker When set to MAX the center image is heard as a phantom center image from the front left and right speakers When set on the 1 to 6 scale the center image is heard in various combinations of the front and center speakers Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby MUSIC modes MIN 1 to 6 MAX CUSTOM Opens the CUSTOM menu which is used to compare custom and factory default versions of the selected listening mode and to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode Available in all modes CUSTOM VS PRESET Allows comparison listening to the custom and factory default versions of the selected listening m
188. ion 2CH BYPASS STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE 2 23 Basic Operation Lexicon DIGITAL STATUS Provides information about digital input sources for which a sample rate is detected but no audio is present in the input signal Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE The current listening mode INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz See Status Menu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 25 for detailed information DIGITAL STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE LIVE STATUS Provides information about LIVE input sources Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE The current listening mode INPUT TYPE MIC SAMPLE RATE 48kHz See Status Menu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 25 for detailed information 2CH STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE 2 24 12 Basic Operation STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS 2 0 ENCODING Indicates whether or not a matrix encoded source is detected When the parameter setting is MATRIX a matrix encoded source is detected When the parameter setting is NONE a matrix encoded source is not detected The MC 12 cannot automatically detect matrix encoding in non flagged input sources MATRIX NONE BIT RATE Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded A higher bit rate indicates that less compression was used during the encoding process Possible
189. ion When standby mode is deactivated pressing the standby button activates standby mode and deactivates the MC 12 The red front panel standby button LED lights to indicate that standby mode is activated Note Power is still supplied to the MC 12 when standby mode is activated N Y Activates the remote control back light illuminating remote control buttons making them more visible in the dark The back light also illuminates whenever a remote control button is pressed Once illuminated the back light remains on for about 5 seconds before extinguishing UJ Activates the Main Zone command bank which includes commands that control the Main Zone Activates the Zone 2 command bank which includes commands that control the Zone 2 Activates the Record Zone command bank which includes commands that control the Record and Main Zones Activates the Shift command bank which includes commands that control the Main Zone A 0000 Selects the DVD1 input for the Main Zone Selects the DVD1 input for Zone 2 Selects the DVD1 input for the Record Zone Deactivates the Main Zone Selects the DVD2 input for the Main Zone Selects the DVD2 input for Zone 2 Selects the DVD2 input for the Record Zone Deactivates Zone 2 Selects the LD input for the Main Zone Selects the LD input for Zone 2 Selects the LD input for the Record Zone Deactivates the Record Z
190. it n nesteit ei saa kaataa yksikk n l kytke audiotehovahvistimen l ht j suoraan mihink n yksik n liittimeen S hk iskun ja palovaaran v ltt miseksi yksikk ei saa olla sateessa tai kosteassa eik sit saa k ytt m r ss ymp rist ss l k yt yksikk jos se on pudonnut vaurioitunut kostunut tai jos sen suori tuskyky on huomattavasti muuttunut mik vaatii huoltoa Yksik n saa avata vain laitteeseen perehtynyt huoltohenkil Kansien poisto altistaa sinut vaarallisille j nnitteille T m kolmio joka esiintyy komponentissasi varoittaa sinua erist m tt m n vaarallisen j nnitteen esiintymisest yksik n sis ll T m j nnite saattaa olla riitt v n korkea aiheuttamaan s hk iskuvaaran dokumentoinnissa esiintyy t rkeit k ytt ja yll pito ohjeita kolmio joka esiintyy komponentissasi kertoo sinulle ett t ss tuote viii 12 Introduction NORSK VIKTIG INFORMASJON OM SIKKERHET N 0j Ta vare denne veiledningen for senere bruk F lg alle anvisningene og advarslene som er angitt pa apparatet Apparatet skal alltid anvendes med korrekt spenning Produktbeskrivelsen inne holder spesifikasjoner for stromkrav Veer oppmerksom at det ved ulike drift sspenninger kan v re n dvendig bruke en annen ledning og eller stopseltype Apparatet skal ikke monteres i skap uten ventilasjon eller direkte over varmepro duser
191. ited frequency range of up to 120Hz The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front side and rear speakers are present Note The MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings PANORAMA OFF ON OFF CTR WIDTH 3 MIN 1 to 6 MAX DIMENSION NEUTRAL FRONT NEUTRAL REAR SURROUND 10ms OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM 0 to 15ms Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions DOPL THX MODE ADJUST QA DOPL TEX This mode is designed for playback of Dolby Surround encoded sources and decodes four channels three front channels and one mono surround channel with a high frequency rolloff above 7kHz This mode is recommended for home theaters with THX certified speakers Dolby PL THX mode e Applies THX re equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and may sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization e Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels which results in smoother sound movements between them Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35
192. ize the selected listening mode These adjustments are applied when the listening mode is next activated All listening mode menus are shown in the Appendix The parameters on the left side of the menus differ from listening mode to listening mode The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable Factory default parameter settings are shown for each listening mode When the MODE ADJUST menu opens the activated listening mode is highlighted To activate a different listening mode you must use one of the methods described in Listening Mode Activation below LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION The MC 12 allows listening mode activation in the Main Zone Listening modes are available for 2 channel Dolby Digital DTS ES analog and microphone sources In some cases the MC 12 automati cally activates a listening mode in response to certain commands For this reason it is important to understand the three methods through which listening mode activation occurs Listening modes activation occurs through The INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters e The front panel or remote control Mode and buttons e The remote control mode family selection buttons THX Dolby Digital LOGIC 7 TVL DTS and MUSIC 5 2 12 Mode Adjust PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION PARAMETERS You can select five preferred listening modes for each Main Zone input including one listening mode each for 2 cha
193. llow 5 1 channel analog sources to use bass management speaker crossovers speaker distance calibration and audio controls tone controls The 5 1a THX UL2Cin 5 1a THX SurEX and 5 1a THX listening modes are recommended for home theaters with THX certified speakers These modes apply e THX re equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization e THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels which results in smoother sound movements between them The listening mode name differs depending on the SURROUND EX parameter setting and the speaker setup The table at the top of the next page indicates the conditions in which THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding are activated 5 29 Mode Adjust Lexicon 5 1a EX UL2Cin 5 1a THX SurEX amp 5 1a IEX continued BRAH on or Input Source Parameter Setting 5 1 Channel Analog 5 1 Channel THX Surround EX 5 1 Channel THX Surround EX Analog Flagged Analog Non Flagged SURROUND EX ON 5 1a THX SurEX 5 1a THX SurEX 5 1a THX SurEX SURROUND EX OFF 5 1a THX ULTRA2 5 1a THX ULTRA2 5 1a THX ULTRA2 The 5 1a THX UL2Cin listening mode The 5 1a THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side and rear speaker
194. low the highest microphone level Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con nected to the MC 12 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on page 3 42 to confirm that the microphones are appropri ately positioned for the microphone check The microphone might be damaged Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con nected to the MC 12 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on page 3 42 to confirm that the microphones are appropri ately positioned for the microphone check The microphone might be damaged Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance MICROPHONE TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE The microphone level could not be deter mined because of excessive room noise in the listening space Eliminate extraneous noises in the listening space including conversations air conditioners and sounds that filter in through open doors and windows The microphone might be damaged Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOM
195. ltage inside the enclosure voltage that may be sufficient to Represents a menu path The menu items in gray boxes must be constitute a risk of shock selected with the remote control Menu arrow to access the menu or menu item in the black box For example the SETUP Appears on the component to indicate impor INPUTS and DVD1 menu items must be selected to open the tant operating and maintenance instructions in DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu the accompanying literature The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is used here as an example and will Calls attention to a procedure practice condi continue to be used as an example throughout this document tion or the like that if not correctly performed Whenever it appears any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substi or adhered to could result in injury or death tuted Likewise whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path any other input may be substituted CAUTION Calls attention to a procedure practice condi tion or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage or destruction to part or all of the product Note Calls attention to information that is essential to highlight This document uses the term MC 12 to refer to both the MC 12 and MC 12 Balanced Digital Controllers unless otherwise specified This document uses the term DTS ES to indicate that DTS ES encoding may or may not be present in the input source 12 Introduction T
196. ly activates the 5 1 L7 MUSIC listening mode If the DVD1 input is then selected while a DTS ES source is present the MC 12 automatically activates the DTS or DTS ES L7 FILM listening mode When a preferred listening mode is selected the MC 12 automati cally activates that listening mode whenever a new input is selected or an appropriate input source is present For example the DVD1 and CD INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters are set as shown at the top of the next column Refer to the Selecting Preferred Listening Modes section that begins on page 3 12 for more information 5 3 Mode Adjust Lexicon MODE BUTTONS Use the front panel and remote control Mode buttons to audition listening modes with the current Main Zone input source Press the Mode or button to scroll up or down through the available listening modes for the current Main Zone input source For example if a 2 channel source is present in the Main Zone the Mode buttons can be used to audition 2 channel listening modes Scrolling occurs in the order shown on the MODE ADJUST menu The selected listening mode appears in the bottom left corner of the Main Zone two line status The selected listening mode is automatically activated when scrolling stops MODE FAMILY SELECTION BUTTONS The remote control mode family selection buttons select a listening mode within the corresponding mode family Pressing a mode family selection button a
197. mains deactivated at all times and will not reactivate until the STATUS parameter is reset to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS gt FRONT PANEL DISPLAY PANEL DISPLAY ALWAYS ON gt 2 SECONDS BRIGHTNESS ig ALWAYS OFF OFF OFF 100 A 75 50 25 BRIGHTNESS 10096 7596 5096 2596 Er gt Lm Gd EE Controls the illumination of front panel display characters When a setting is selected front panel display characters automatically adjust to the selected illumination percentage 3 65 Lexicon VOLUME CONTROL SETUP Ei e Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu to configure the Main Zone Zone 2 and Record Zone volume levels SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROL SETUP MAIN PWR ON EUNE MUTE LEVEL 30dB ZONE PWR ON 30dB REC PWR ON 30dB MAX VOLUME 120B MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION LAST LVL 80 to 12dB 10dB 20dB 30dB 40dB FULL MUTE Parameter Default Setting Possible Setting MAIN ON 30dB LAST LVL 80 to 12dB MUTE LEVEL 30dB 10dB 20dB 30dB 404 FULL MUTE LAST LVL 80 to 12dB LAST LVL 80 to 12dB 80 to 12dB ZONE PWR ON 30dB REC PWR ON 30dB MAX VOLUME 12dB MAIN PWR ON Selects the volume level at which the Main
198. may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd U S Patent Nos 5 043 970 5 189 703 and or 5 222 056 European Patent No 0323830 Other U S and foreign patents pending Lucasfilm is a trademark of Lucasfilm Ltd DTS DTS ES Neo 6 and DTS 96 24 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc SACD is a trademark of Sony Electronics Inc SHARC is a Trademark of Analog Devices Inc Lexicon Logic 7 and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries Inc U S Patent Nos D454 553 D454 860 5 796 844 5 870 480 and other worldwide patents issued and pending 2005 Harman International Industries Incorporated All rights reserved This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Harman Specialty Group The information it contains is subject to change without notice Harman Specialty Group assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within this document Introduction Lexicon DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS This document contains general safety installation and operation instructions for the MC 12 and MC 12 Balanced Digital Controllers It is important to read this user guide before attempting to use the product Pay particular attention to safety instructions The following symbols are used in the document Appears on the component to indicate the pres ED D gt gt 8 ence of uninsulated dangerous vo
199. meter 5 22 5 28 5 32 5 41 MAX VOLUME parameter 3 67 MC 12 about 1 2 highlights 1 4 product registration 1 5 menu arrow buttons 2 11 MENU button 2 17 menu item selection 2 11 menu navigation 2 11 menu options 2 12 selecting 2 12 menu parameters 2 12 Menu tree A 5 MIC parameter 3 14 MICROPHONE CHECK option 3 35 microphone input connectors 2 10 microphone placement 3 41 MID RT parameter 5 12 5 41 MIX ROOM parameter 2 21 2 26 MODE ADJUST menu 5 2 mode buttons 2 5 2 16 5 4 MODE parameter 2 22 2 24 2 26 MODES parameter 3 70 A 21 MONO listening mode 5 16 MONO LOGIC listening mode 5 15 MONO SUB parameter 3 34 MONO SURROUND listening mode 5 16 Music button 2 18 5 4 Mute button 2 4 2 16 MUTE LEVEL parameter 3 66 A 21 MUTE ON message 2 4 N NAME parameter 3 5 NIGHTCLUB listening mode 5 10 OFF buttons 2 5 ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu 3 63 A 22 OSD button See remote control 2 16 output connectors audio 2 7 trigger 2 10 Output Level Parameters 3 33 OUTPUT LEVELS menu 5 35 Output levels calibrating automatic 3 35 Bass Peak Limiters 3 57 manual 3 54 parameters 3 33 P PANORAMA calibration 5 13 Panorama listening mode 5 12 PANORAMA parameter 5 8 5 41 parameter drop down menus 2 12 parameters listening mode menu 5 37 program operation 3 68 selecting 2 12 STATUS menu 2 25 parameters preferred listening mode selection 3 12 1 3 Index
200. meter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions Refer to page 5 35 5 17 Mode Adjust Lexicon IHx THX UL2Cin amp THX SurEX on on These modes are designed for 7 channel playback of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital film sources that do not have THX Surround EX encoding They apply THX re equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization THX timbre matching is applied to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels which results in smoother sound movements between them These modes are recommended for home theaters with THX certified speakers The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the SURROUND EX parameter setting and the speaker setup The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior of the THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX modes when activated The THX ULTRA2 listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the SURROUND EX parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected e The THX SurEX listening mode is available when both the side an
201. modes 5 47 Mode Adjust Lexicon The parameter Is used in these modes SOURCE PANORAMA CALIBRATION SPEAKER ANGLE PANORAMA CALIBRATION SPEECH DETECT NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH and CATHEDRAL SPREAD All LIVE modes SUB L R amp SUB L R LVL All except LIVE modes SURR ROLLOFF All L7 modes SURROUND DLY SURROUND EX DPLII MUSIC and DPLIIx MUSIC THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX THX SURROUND MIX TREB CUT RT 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL All LIVE modes VOCAL ENHANCE All L7 modes 5 48 ting amp Maintenance Troubleshooting iiiter iiinis irns taiese ersi 6 2 Routine 6 3 Restoring Factory default 6 4 Troubleshooting amp Maintenance Lexicon TROUBLESHOOTING The MC 12 does not power on 1 Make sure the rear panel power switch is set to the I on position 2 Attempt to power on the MC 12 with the front panel Standby button and remote control On button 3 Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection between the rear panel AC input connector and the wall outlet 4 Check the electrical circuit and breaker The remote control does not work 1 Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the front panel IR receiver When the MC 12 is not using the rear panel IR IN connector the re
202. moked glass cabinet will reduce the remote control range e Remote controls for different components can interfere with one another Avoid using remote controls for different compo nents at the same time e Remote control batteries should be replaced as needed 2 10 MC 12 Basic Operation MAIN MENU MENU NAVIGATION The MAIN MENU represents the beginning of FF tt Use the remote control Menu and arrow buttons to navigate the the menu structure Use the MAIN MENU extensive menu structure shown in the Appendix The table below open the three main menu branches MODE indicates the navigation commands remote control buttons ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP SETUP perform when the Main Zone command bank is activated Button Navigation Function s When no menus are displayed press the MENU button to open the MAIN MENU When a menu is open press the MENU button to close the menu structure When no menus are displayed press the arrow button to open the MAIN MENU When a menu is open press the arrow button to select the highlighted menu item lt v S When menu is open press the 4 arrow button to close the menu and in most cases open the previous menu Sub sequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed When the MAIN MENU is closed the menu structure is also closed When no menus are displayed pressing the
203. mote control must be in line of sight with the front panel IR receiver for proper opera tion The remote control might also become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver 2 Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted with the proper polarity 3 Replace the remote control batteries When the batteries are low on power the remote control enters a low voltage condi tion that prevents it from operating the MC 12 The MC 12 is powered on but there is no audio 1 Examine the audio cables to ensure a good connection between the MC 12 and all associated power amplifiers 2 Make sure volume level is audible Volume level can be increased with the front panel volume knob or the remote con trol VOL and buttons 3 Make sure audio has not been muted The message MUTE ON or FULL MUTE ON will appear in the on screen and front panel displays when audio has been muted To deactivate mute press the Mute button or adjust the volume level 4 Checkthe INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG IN parameters to ensure the appropriate audio connector is assigned to the selected input 5 Make sure the MC 12 is receiving an audio signal To do this follow the instructions that begin on page 2 20 to open the STATUS menu for the current input source 6 Make sure all associated power amplifiers are powered on Dialog sounds muffled If the speaker setup does not include a cente
204. n Lexicon 16 Selects the THX mode family for the current input source Reserved for possible future expansion Reserved for possible future expansion Activates the 5 1 THX ULTRAA 5 1 THX SurEX or 5 1 THX listening mode when a 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source is present Selects the Dolby mode family for the current input source Reserved for possible future expansion Reserved for possible future expansion Activates the Dolby Digital EX or Dolby Digital listening mode when a 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source is present Selects the LOGIC 7 FILM mode family for the current input source Reserved for possible future expansion Reserved for possible future expansion Activates the PANORAMA listening mode Selects the LOGIC 7 TV mode family for the current input source Reserved for possible future expansion Reserved for possible future expansion Activates the MONO LOGIC listening mode for 2 channel sources and the 5 1 MONO LOGIC listening mode for 5 1 channel sources Selects the DTS mode family for the current input source Reserved for possible future expansion Reserved for possible future expansion When a DTS ES source is present pressing the dts button toggles the ES DECODING parameter cycling through the AUTO ON and OFF settings Selects the LOGIC 7 MUSIC mode family for the current input source Reserved for po
205. n CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes ON OFF 5ms to 48 6s CAUTION Setting the BASS RT MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high value may produce undesirable or damaging audio BASS XOVER 30Hz to 19 9kHz OFF Sets the frequency at which BASS RT applies Available in all LIVE modes CALIBRATION Opens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu which is used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode Refer to PANORAMA on page 5 12 for more information Available in PANORAMA mode 5 37 Mode Adjust Lexicon LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION amp PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS continued CENTER Controls the output level of the audio output connector labeled Center Available in all except 2 CH modes 2 CHANNEL 2 CH BYPASS DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1a 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 MONO and LIVE modes OFF 30 to 12dB CENTER DEPTH 0 to 18 Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel changing the perceived distance of the center speaker Higher settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived distance of the center speaker from the listening position Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes CENTER MIX Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing Set this parameter to 0dB for film sources and 5dB for music sources Available in 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN and 5 1a 2 CHANNEL modes 25 to 5dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES Controls the relative t
206. n Screen Display M 3 63 Front Panel Display e tee Een 3 65 V l ume Contr l Setup IURE ERR A 3 66 TG SES UU Rm 3 68 LOCK ODEON eMe m 3 70 LIVE Calibration Reus 3 71 Lexicon SETUP Selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION INPUTS Ei gt Ed Prompts for an input selection e g DVD1 and opens the corre sponding INPUT SETUP menu When the menu is open you can change input names assign audio and video input connectors select preferred listening modes and configure Main Zone Zone 2 and Record Zone settings See INPUT SETUP on page 3 4 for more information SPEAKERS EZ Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup See SPEAKER SETUP on page 3 22 for more information REAR PANEL CONFIG REAR Opens the REAR PANEL CONFIG menu to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo connectors or as five stereo and one 5 1 channel connectors See REAR PANEL CONFIG on page 3 59 for more information DISPLAYS EX 2 Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu to customize the on screen an
207. n must be pressed within 2 seconds of deac tivating standby mode Otherwise the MUTE ON message will appear on the on screen and front panel displays If this occurs too much time has passed Begin again with step 2 Press the and arrow buttons to highlight the desired option e Highlight RESTORE DEFAULTS to restore factory default settings Highlight EXIT to close the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factory default settings When the desired option is highlighted press the arrow button to select this option e f the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected the FAC TORY SETTINGS message shown on the previous page will appear on the on screen and front panel displays When this message appears press a front panel or remote control but ton to restart the MC 12 e If the EXIT option is selected the FACTORY SETTINGS menu will close and the two line status will open on the on screen and front panel displays Appendix SpEcifHCAtIONS Mm A 2 Declaration of Conformity sesssessesesesssssssssssssrerereeeesesessesssssse A 4 M nu Tressie onirin en E UT EN A 5 Installation Worksheet A 20 Appendix Lexicon SPECIFICATIONS Audio Input amp Output Connectors Analog Audio Inputs Digital Audio Inputs 8 stereo RCA or 5 stereo and one 5 1 channel connectors 6 S PDIF coaxial RCA 6 S PDIF optical 5 TosLink and 1 optical mini jack and 1 AE
208. n opens the MAIN MENU Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu ZONE2 BALANCE parameter Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu RECORD BALANCE parameter Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone BALANCE and FADER parameters Closes the current 4 menu or opens the menu structure and selects the highlighted menu item gt Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu ZONE2 BALANCE parameter left and right Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu RECORD BALANCE parameter left and right Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone BALANCE parameters left and right Scroll upward and downward through menu items Increase and decrease subwoofer output levels applied to the current listening mode Reserved for possible future expansion Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone FADER parameters forward 4 and backward v Toggles between 7 and 5 channel playback NOTE Use of this button during LIVE voids the LIVE calibration Reserved for possible future expansion Reserved for possible future expansion Adjusts the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter cycling through the ANALOG DIGITAL and AUTO settings Toggles between the current listening mode and the 2 CHANNEL listening mode Reserved for possible future expansion Reserved for possible future expansion Toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter between ON and OFF Basic Operatio
209. nce from the remote control Press the Shift button e Press the MENU button to center the Main Zone balance e Press the lt arrow buttons to adjust the Main Zone balance left and right FADER B lt lt l gt gt F Controls the front to back balance of the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R To control the fade from the remote control Press the Shift button Press the MENU button to center the Main Zone fader e Press the or v arrow buttons to adjust the Main Zone fader backward and forward ZONE2 BALANCE M e E Controls the left to right balance of the Zone 2 audio output connectors L lt lt l gt gt R To control the Zone 2 balance from the remote control Press the ZONE button e Press the MENU button to center the Zone2 balance e Press the lt or gt arrow buttons to adjust the Zone2 balance left and right RECORD BALANCE Controls the left to right balance of the Record Zone analog audio output connectors L lt lt l gt gt R To control the balance from the remote control Press the REC button e Press the MENU button to center the Main Zone balance e Press the 4 or arrow buttons to adjust the record balance left and right 4 7 SS IC Mode Adjust Mode AdjUSt a 5 2 Listening Mode Activation 5 2 Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters 5 3 Mode BUt
210. ned at a large angle from the display device Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EFFECT LVL 4dB 12 to 6dB BASS CONTENT STEREO BINAURL MONO STEREO LOW FREQ WIDTH 0 25 to 25dB SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms INPUT BALANCE lt l gt 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF OFF 1 to 30ms L lt to lt l gt to gt R CALIBRATION Refer to next column OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 12 12 Mode Adjust PANORAMA CALIBRATION PANORAMA CALIBRATION SOURCE LEFT amp RIGHT SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg LISTENER POS 0 ENSURE THAT SPEAKER SETUP HAS BEEN PROPERLY PERFORMED Select PANORAMA CALIBRATION to open the PANORAMA CALIBRATION menu shown to the left to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode This listening mode must be calibrated to take full advantage of its effects For best results you should center the primary listening position between the front left and right speakers as shown in illus tration B at the top of the next page center Otherwise the PANORAMA listening mode will be calibrated with varying results An external calibration source is required to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode You should select a familiar stereo source Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings SOURCE LEFT amp RIGHT RIG
211. nel input sources with enhanced front steering Parameter VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0 FRONT STEERING FILM Default Setting Possible Settings 6 0 3 0dB 0 0dB OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF OFF ON SOUND STAGE REAR REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500HZ to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1ms to 30ms COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0 10 0dB to 0 0 OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions Refer to page 5 35 5 117 MUSIC This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital encoded music sources Based on the 5 1 L7 FILM listening mode 5 1 L7 MUSIC derives seven channels from 5 1 channel input sources with enhanced front steering Parameter VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0 FRONT STEERING MUSIC Default Setting Possible Settings 6 0 3 0dB 0 0dB OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF OFF ON SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500HZ to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1ms to 30ms COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0dB to 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Para
212. ng mode is only available when the front side and rear speakers are present Note the following The 5 1 PLIIx MUS listening mode cannot be assigned as the preferred listening mode for 2 channel sources However when the 2 CH parameter is set to USE LAST the MC 12 automati cally activates the 5 1 PLIIx MUS listening mode if the 5 1 PLIIx MUS listening mode was activated the last time a 2 channel source was present e The 5 1 PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EX DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0 to 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 5 20 12 Mode Adjust DO DIGITAL amp XI DIGITAL EX Lg e Er These listening modes are designed to decode and playback 5 1 discrete channels from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources The five main channels are full frequency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a limited frequency range of 120Hz The mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the EX DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for Dolby Digital sources recorded with Dolby Digital
213. ning Microphone Center Subwoofer Front Right 3 46 12 Setup PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES amp LEVELS DISTANCES OUTPUT LEVELS gt AUTO SPEAKER SETUP CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR SIT QUIETLY VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION PLACE MICROPHONES IN PRIMARY LISTENING POSITIONS SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING PRESS TO BEGIN COUNTDOWN Follow the procedures in the appropriate table column for the desired type of automatic calibration DISTANCES DISTANCES amp LEVELS Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu AUTOMATIC option as shown in the menu illustration above f a microphone check is successful the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu becomes available on the on screen display Press the a arrow button to highlight the automatic calibration option you want Then press the arrow button to select this option Refer to the table on page 3 35 for more information about automatic calibration options e If a microphone check is unsuccessful one of the error messages shown at the right appears on the on screen display indicat ing that a successful microphone check is required
214. nnel Dolby Digital DTS ES 5 1 channel analog and microphone sources The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to select preferred listening modes Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters 2 CH Selects a preferred listening mode for 2 channel sources 000 Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources dts E Selects a preferred listening mode for DTS ES sources 5 1a Selects a preferred listening mode for 5 1 channel analog sources MIC Selects a preferred LIVE listening mode for micro phone sources DVD1 INPUT SETUP CD INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 NAME CD DIGITAL IN COAX 1 DIGITAL IN COAX 4 ANALOG IN NONE ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 VIDEO IN COMPOSITE 1 COMPONENT IN 1 COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH rz FILM d rz MUSIC ooD 5 1 rz FILM 5 1 rz MUSIC dts it s A dts 15 EAE 5 1a rz FILM 5 1a 5 1a rz FILM MIC LIVE MED MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED RECORD ADVANCED If the DVD1 input is selected while a 2 channel source is present the MC 12 automatically activates the L7 FILM listening mode If a 5 1 channel analog source becomes present the MC 12 automatically activates the 5 1a L7 FILM listening mode If the CD input is selected while a Dolby Digital source is present the MC 12 automatical
215. nput signals through D A conversion before passing them to the Zone 2 or Record Zone analog audio output connectors e When no analog audio input is assigned ZONE2 IN and RECORD IN are set to DIGITAL e The INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN parameter can be used to assign a digital audio input connector for the selected input The MC 12 passes analog audio from the the assigned input to the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors The assigned digital audio input is ignored Zones can be independently monitored Note the following e The MC 12 passes analog sources to all Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors MC 12 passes analog input signals directly to the Zone 2 or Record Zone analog audio output connectors The MC 12 converts analog input signals to digital A D conversion before passing them to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors e When no digital audio input is assigned ZONE2 IN and RECORD IN are set to ANALOG e The INPUT SETUP menu ANALOG IN parameter can be used to assign an analog audio input connector for the selected input The MC 12 passes a downmixed version of Main Zone audio to the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors Zones cannot be independently monitored Downmixing is possible when all of the following conditions are met e same input is selected in both Main Zone and Zone 2 or in both Main Zone and Record Zone Otherwise the Zone
216. ns on page 5 37 for descriptions miTV Lm EN This listening mode is designed for playback of 2 channel stereo or matrix encoded television broadcast sources LOGIC 7 TV is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the LOGIC 7 FILM listening mode but specifically tailored for broadcast sources Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings AUTO AZIMUTH ON ON OFF VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB 6 0 3 0dB 0 0dB FRONT STEERING FILM OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR FRONT NEUTRAL REAR 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1 to 30ms OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions Mode Adjust Lexicon 121 MUSIC MODE ADJUST gt EDS This listening mode is designed for playback of 2 channel stereo or matrix encoded music sources LOGIC 7 MUSIC is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the LOGIC 7 FILM listening mode but specifically tailored for music sources Parameter VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB FRONT STEERING MUSIC Default Setting Possible Settings 6 0 3 0dB 0 0dB OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL FRONT NEUTRAL REAR 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF
217. ns a drop down menu or horizontal bar graph that is used to select the desired setting PARAMETER DROP DOWN MENUS Selecting a menu parameter opens a drop down menu that contains a list of available parameter settings For example selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu CUSTOM NAME parameter opens a drop down menu which is used to select the ON or OFF setting DISPLAY SETUP ON ON SCREEN DISPLAY FRONT PANEL DISPLAY AN SYNC DELAY OFF CUSTOM NAME OFF EDIT CUSTOM NAME To select a setting in a parameter drop down menu 1 When the drop down menu opens press the remote control a Or v arrow button to scroll up or down through the complete list of available settings The current setting is displayed beneath the parameter name in the on screen and front panel displays 2 When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter name press the arrow button to accept the setting and close the drop down menu HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPHS Selecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph The bar graph indicates the position the current parameter setting falls within the entire parameter range The setting appears to the right of the parameter name in the on screen and front panel displays For example selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu A V SYNC DELAY parameter opens the horizontal bar graph shown below which is used to adjust the amount of audio delay DISPLAY SETUP OFF 1 to 60ms ON SCREEN DISPLAY FRONT
218. nt Variable Environment is a proprietary mode designed to transform the way your listening room sounds It provides a realistic illusion of a larger more reverberant listening space LIVE SMALL simulates the reverberations of a room that is small but larger than an average living room LIVE LARGE simulates the reverberations of a large hall LIVE requires two permanently mounted microphones See LIVE Calibration on page 3 71 for placement and calibration instructions LIVE cannot be used with prerecorded sources such as CD or DVD When LIVE is activated the BASS TREBLE and TILT EQ audio controls are set to 0 0dB and LOUDNESS is set to OFF until LIVE is deactivated LIVE SMALL parameter settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings MID RT 597ms 115ms to 15 4s BASS RT 597ms 23ms to 30 8ms ROLLOFF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz TREB CUT RT 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz PRE DELAY 10ms 10ms to 100ms ADVANCED CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 Mode Adjust Lexicon LIVE SMALL LIVE MED amp LIVE LARGE continued Erg LIVE SMALL ADVANCED parameter settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings REVERB LVL 0dB 80dB to 0dB EARLY RFLX LVL 13dB 80dB to 12dB BASS XOVER 156Hz 30Hz to 19 9kHz OFF SHAPE 0 0 to 4 SPREAD 096 096 to 10096 SIZE 19m 4m to 60m LIVE MED parameter settings Parameter Default Setting Possible
219. ntrol Press the Shift button e Press the PVR button to increase the TREBLE parameter setting in 0 5dB increments e Press the TUNER button to decrease the TREBLE parameter setting in 0 5dB increments e Press the OSD button to set the BASS TREBLE and TILT EQ parameters to 0 0dB TREBLE The TREBLE parameter controls the amount of boost or cut applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R and Center 4 4 12 Audio Controls TILT EQ 3 0 to 43 0 COO e Controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center LFE and Subwoofer L R This parameter setting affects the entire frequency spectrum with a hinge point at 1kHz As the setting increases frequencies higher than 1kHz are boosted while frequencies lower than 1kHz are simultaneously cut As the setting decreases frequencies higher than 1kHz are cut while frequencies lower than 1kHz are simultaneously boosted The graph shown at the right indicates the frequency response of all TILT EQ parameter settings TILT id To control the tilt EQ from the remote control Press the Shift button e Press the GAME button to increase the TILT EQ parameter setting in 0 5dB increments e Press the AUX button to decrease the TILT EQ parameter setting 0 5dB increments e Press the OSD button to set the BASS TREBLE and TILT EQ parameters to 0 0cB 5k 10k 20k The TILT EQ
220. nutenzione Il presente triangolo impresso sul componente avverte utente della pre PORTUGUESE INSTRU ES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURAN A CPT Guarde essas instru es para uso posterior Siga todas as instru es e fique atento aos avisos marcados na unidade e nas instrugdes de operac o Sempre use com a voltagem correta Veja no manual de instru es do fabricante qual a alimenta o necess ria Lembre se que voltagens de opera o diferentes podem precisar de um cabo ou plug diferentes instale a unidade em um suporte sem ventilac o ou diretamente acima de equipamentos que produzam calor como transformadores Observe a temperatura ambiente m xima opera o indicada na especifica o do produto O revestimento da unidade provido de fendas e aberturas para ventila o para assegurar uma opera o confi vel e evitar que a unidade se superaque a N o blo queie cubra ou insira objetos nas aberturas Nunca derrube l quido de qualquer esp cie na unidade Nunca ligue sa das de amplificadores de udio diretamente a qualquer dos conec tores da unidade Para evitar danos de choque ou fogo n o exponha a unidade chuva ou umidade ou opere a onde haja exposi o gua N o tente operar a unidade se ela for derrubada danificada exposta l quidos ou apresente uma mudan a de performance not vel indicando a necessidade de manuten o Esta unidade s deveria ser aberta atrav s de pes
221. ode Refer to page 5 33 for information Available in all modes DIMENSION Controls the relative balance of the sound field which can be useful with certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance among all speakers When set to FRONT the sound field is balanced toward the front of the listening space When set to NEUTRAL the sound field is balanced at the center of the listening space When set to REAR the sound field is balanced toward the rear of the listening space Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes FRONT NEUTRAL REAR 5 38 12 Mode Adjust EARLY RFLX LVL 80dB to 12dB OFF Controls the amount of additional early reflections Available in all LIVE modes EFFECT LVL Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA MONO LOGIC and 5 1 MONO LOGIC modes 12 to ES DECODING Controls DTS ES decoding which extracts a rear channel from 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES and 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES sources When ON is selected DTS ES decoding is activated for all DTS ES sources When OFF is selected DTS ES decoding is deactivated for all DTS ES sources When AUTO is selected DTS ES decoding is activated when a 5 1 channel matrix encoded or a 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES source is detected DTS ES decoding is deactivated when a 5 1 channel DTS source is de
222. ompensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the primary listening position Select the setting closest to the angle between the front left and right speakers and the primary listening position Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5 13 for more information about the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION 10 to 90deg SPEECH DETECT Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources When set to ON effects are lowered to minimize interference and unnatural echo in monaural speech When stereo input sources are present the front left and right channels are independently used as inputs for ambience synthesis When strong monaural speech is present in the input source the monaural component of the ambience effect is reduced and the stereo component of the effect is increased When set to OFF the amount of ambience synthesis is dynamically controlled Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes ON OFF SPREAD Controls the timing between the initial reflections that most audibly create the sound of a real room SHAPE and SPREAD work together if either is set to 0 the other has no effect Available in all LIVE modes 0 to 10096 SUB L R amp SUB L R LVL Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Subwoofer L R The SUB L R parameter appears on the listening mode OUTPUT LEVELS menu The SUB L R LVL parameter appears on listenin
223. on This equipment generates uses and radiates radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on The user is encour aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Recorient or relocate the receiving antenna e increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is con nected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio televi sion technician for help This triangle which appears on your component alerts you to important operating and maintenance instructions in this accompanying literature exicon H A Harman International Company Lexicon Inc 3 Oak Park Bedford MA 01730 1413 USA Tel 781 280 0300 Fax 781 280 0490 www harmanspecialtygroup com Customer Service Telephone 781 280 0300 Sales Fax 781 280 0495 Service Fax 781 280 0499 Part No 070 14773 Rev4 05 05 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories Inc and is a registered trademark of Dolby Used under authorization THX Ultra and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd which
224. on them 1 Make sure the MC 12 is powered off or in standby mode 2 Connect the Lexicon microphones to the microphone input 1 and 2 connectors on the MC 12 rear panel shown above Connector 1 is for the left microphone connector 2 is for the right Microphones connected to inputs 3 and 4 will be ignored during LIVE calibration and operation Make sure each microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid connection During the microphone check the microphones will be referred to as 1 and 2 based on the input connector to which the microphone is connected You should label the micro phones for troubleshooting purposes 3 Power on the MC 12 or deactivate standby mode 3 71 Setu p Lexicon POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR LIVE Refer to the microphone placement examples below to position the microphones for LIVE P RO P E R microphone positioning for LIVE Position the microphones V On or near opposite side walls V Approximately halfway between the front and side speakers V At an approximate height between the waist and head of a standing person V In a location unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures V At least 2 feet 0 61m from all speakers Note LIVE can potentially create feedback in the system The processing is designed to prevent this but you should avoid placing the microphones too close to i speakers Microphone Center The illustration to the right provides an example of
225. one Selects the TV input for the Main Zone Selects the TV input for Zone 2 Selects the TV input for the Record Zone Sets the AUDIO CONTROLS menu LOUDNESS parameter to ON 12 Basic Operation A 0 0 6 6 Selects the SAT input for the Main Zone Selects the SAT input for Zone 2 Selects the SAT input for the Record Zone Sets the AUDIO CONTROLS menu LOUDNESS parameter to OFF Selects the VCR input for the Main Zone Selects the VCR input for Zone 2 Selects the VCR input for the Record Zone Reserved for possible future expansion Selects the CD input for the Main Zone Selects the CD input for for Zone 2 Selects the CD input for the Record Zone Increases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu BASS parameter in 0 5dB increments Selects the PVR input for the Main Zone Selects the PVR input for Zone 2 Selects the PVR input for the Record Zone Increases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu TREBLE parameter in 0 5dB increments Selects the GAME input for the Main Zone Selects the GAME input for Zone 2 Selects the GAME input for the Record Zone Increases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu TILT EQ parameter in 0 2dB increments Selects the TAPE input for the Main Zone Selects the TAPE input for Zone2 Selects the TAPE input for the Record Zone Decreases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu BASS parameter in 0 5dB increments
226. opriate channels with maximum separation When set to OFF the accuracy of the selected listening mode varies among sources It is recommended that you set this parameter to ON for film and broadcast sources and to OFF for music sources Available in L7 FILM and L7 TV modes BASS CONTENT BINAURAL MONO STEREO Adjusts the bass content of binaural mono and stereo recordings When set to BINAURL the MC 12 activates low frequency compen sation Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded with ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF dummy head microphones Select the MONO setting for sources recorded with mono bass Select the STEREO setting for sources recorded with stereo bass Available in PANORAMA mode BASS ENHANCE Enhances stereo bass which results in low frequency reproduction that is less localizable and more realistic in the listening space The effectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies depending on room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers to reproduce low frequencies It is recommended that you use front side or rear speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of 40Hz or lower Available in all Logic 7 modes BASS RT Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount of time required for low frequency information to decay below 60dB in level In smaller listening spaces the BASS RT parameter setting should match the MID RT parameter setting for more natural effects Available i
227. ould cause this error However the MC 12 does not report this error unless at least half of the microphones detect out of phase calibration noise signals Reflections from room objects can cause an out of phase error Drivers intentionally wired out of phase SPEAKER SIGNAL TOO LOW SPEAKER UNABLE TO CALCULATE The microphones detected calibration noise signals at an unusually low level The microphones did not detect calibra tion noise signals or the MC 12 could not calculate a value The microphones might be positioned more than 30 feet 9 14m from the selected speaker or in a location where echoes obscure calibration noise signals Refer to the placement examples on pages 3 42 to 3 46 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con nected to the MC 12 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3 42 to 3 46 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con nected to the MC 12 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection SPEAKER MAY NOT BE ACCURATE One or more microphones did not detect calibration noise signals at a reasonable level The c
228. ound EX decoding is not engaged when a non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected AUTO ON OFF Note The MC 12 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources A non flagged input source does not identify Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in the input signal The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged The Dolby DIGITAL listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged Refer to the Dolby DIGITAL EX amp Dolby DIGITAL listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5 19 for more information 5 39 Mode Adjust Lexicon LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION amp PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS continued Note the following LFE OFF 30 0 to 012dB e Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present This parameter is available in 5 1 PLIIx MOV 5 1 PLIIx MUS DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL modes e When the Shift command bank is activated pressing the remote control DOLBY button while a 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source is present activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL listening mode Subsequent presses adjust the EX DECODING parameter cycling through the AUTO ON and OFF settings FRONT STEERING Adjusts front steering between the front left fron
229. ow frequency signals MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION SPEAKER SETUP CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING Parameter Default Setting Possible Setting CAL NOISE ON ON OFF L R LIMITER ON ON OFF L R LIMIT ADJ 100dB 75 to 120dB LFE LIMITER ON ON OFF LFE LIMIT 100dB 75 to 120dB SET CROSSOVERS MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATION sA ra 0 0dB 0 008 0 048 9 0 008 lt wA aD 0 008 0 048 0 0dB 0 008 Note LEVELS CALIBRATION INTERNAL NOISE TEST EXTERNAL NOISE TEST BASS PEAK LIMITERS BASS PEAK LIMITERS CAL NOISE ON L R LIMITER ON L R LIMIT ADJ 100dB LFE LIMITER ON LFE LIMIT ADJ ICAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS 75 to 120dB ON OFF lt You should configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu parameter settings whether output levels are automatically or manually calibrated 3 57 Lexicon CAL NOISE ON OFF Determines whether bass peak limiters are set with an internal or external calibration source To set the CAL NOISE parameter e Select ON to activate an internal calibration noise signal to set bass peak limiters e Select OFF to deactivate the internal calibration noise signal Setting bass peak limiters with
230. p Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions Mode Adjust Lexicon CIN amp MUSIC e ELLA ok These modes are designed for playback of matrix encoded digital stereo film or music sources DTS Neo 6 derives six channels when both side and rear speakers are present rear channels will be in parallel It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers are present The LFE channel is generated through bass management in the MC 12 Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions Note the following The DTS Neo 6 CIN or MUSIC listening modes cannot be assigned as preferred listening modes for 2 channel sources However when the 2 CH parameter is set to USE LAST the MC 12 automatically activates the DTS Neo 6 CIN or MUSIC listening mode if the mode was active the last time a 2 channel source was present e The MC 12 will not automatically activate a DTS Neo 6 listening mode unless a 44 1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present The DTS Neo 6 listening modes are not available with 88 2kHz or 96kHz Dolby Digital or analog sources The DTS Neo 6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with the front panel or remote control Mode buttons The DTS Neo 6 CIN listening mode can also activated with the remote control DTS button when a 2 channel input sourc
231. page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 1 7 FILM TANN gt The 5 1 L7 FILM mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for playback of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital encoded film sources and provides remarkable improvement compared to other decoders It derives seven channels from 5 1 channel input sources with enhanced front steering When both side and rear speakers are present the 5 1 L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0 6 0 3 0dB 0 0dB FRONT STEERING FILM OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500HZ to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1ms to 30ms COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0dB to 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 16 12 Mode Adjust 5 141 TV This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital encoded broadcast sources Based on the 5 1 L7 FILM listening mode 5 1 L7 TV derives seven channels from 5 1 chan
232. parameters are set to their factory default settings Note The CUSTOM VS PRESET option does not affect current listening mode menu parameter settings CUSTOM PRESET CUSTOM VS PRESET CUSTOM RESET MODE To toggle between the custom and factory default versions of the selected listening mode 1 Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the CUS TOM VS PRESET drop down menu 5 35 Mode Adjust Lexicon 2 When the CUSTOM VS PRESET option drop down menu is open press the remote control and arrow buttons to toggle between the PRESET factory default and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode 3 When finished press the arrow button to close the CUSTOM VS PRESET drop down menu RESET MODE mT Restores the factory default version of the selected listening mode restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory default settings To restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode 1 Follow the RESET MODE menu path to select the RESET MODE option The PRESS RIGHT TO RESTORE MODE message appears on the on screen display CUSTOM PRESS RIGHT PISTAN US gt TO RESTORE MODE CUSTOM VS PRESET RESET MODE 2 Press the arrow button to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode Press the arrow button to close the message without res
233. peration Front Panel Overview 2 2 Rear Panel Overview ccccccssseccecccssecceceseeccceeseseccceeeeeceeseeuees 2 6 Remote Control Overview eese eene 2 10 Operation Considerations eene 2 10 Main 2 11 Menu Navigation nene 2 11 Menu Selection tte nh 2 11 Command Bank Activation seen 2 13 Command Matrix eere nennen nnne 2 14 About the ZONES tiee hotter ete tete tet 2 19 TwWwo linie Status tette te i terrre ER i e 2 19 Stat s IT re 2 20 Status Menu Descriptions eee 2 21 Status Menu Parameter Descriptions 2 25 Status Menu Level Meters 2 26 Setup SOLU Pies 3 2 Input Setup teen ete nee Pere Perte 3 4 Changing Input Names esee nee 3 5 Assigning Audio amp Video Input Connectors 3 7 Selecting Preferred Listening Modes 3 12 Configuring Advanced Input Settings 3 15 INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings 3 17 ZONE2 amp RECORD IN Parameter Settings 3 19 Speaker Setup 3 22 Setting Crossover Points
234. performed For best results you should perform automatic calibration with four microphones that have passed the microphone check However the MC 12 will perform automatic calibration as long as at least one microphone passes the microphone check In this circumstance place the successfully checked microphones in the primary listening position If a microphone check was successful do not disconnect the microphones from the microphone input connectors If the microphones are disconnected you should perform the micro phone check again before proceeding to automatic calibration 3 40 12 Message Description Troubleshooting MICROPHONE OK The microphone detected the calibration noise signal without error N A MICROPHONE NOT DETECTED The MC 12 did not detect the micro phone during the silence check Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con nected to the MC 12 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection The microphone might be damaged Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance MICROPHONE SIGNAL TOO LOW MICROPHONE OUT OF RANGE The MC 12 detected the microphone during the silence check However the microphone level determined during the silence check was not confirmed during the microphone check The microphone level is more than 20dB be
235. r damaging audio 5 42 12 Mode Adjust SOUND STAGE Dynamically controls the relative balance of the audio output connectors When set to FRONT Side L R and Rear L R output levels are attenuated by shifting the perceived balance of the sound field to the front of the listening space When set to NEUTRAL Side L R and Rear L R output levels are slightly attenuated by 3dB shifting the perceived balance of the sound field to the center of the listening space When set to REAR Side L R and Rear L R output levels are not attenuated preserving the intended balance of the sound field Available in all Logic 7 modes FRONT NEUTRAL REAR SOURCE RIGHT LEFT amp RIGHT LEFT Controls the perceived direction of the PANORAMA listening mode external calibration source signal When RIGHT is selected the sound is perceived to come from the right of the primary listening position When LEFT is selected the sound is perceived to come from the left of the primary listening position When LEFT amp RIGHT is selected the sound is perceived to come from all around the primary listening position Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5 13 for more information about the SOURCE parameter Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION Note The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived direction of the sound although both the front left and right speakers generate the external calibration source signal SPEAKER ANGLE C
236. r point equal to the lowest crossover point of any of the other speakers For example if CUSTOM SETUP menu parameters are set as shown above set the SUB XOVER parameter to 80Hz the lowest crossover point of the other speakers In a custom setup low frequencies are generally redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points Signals lower than the lowest crossover point are redirected to the subwoofer If the lowest crossover point is FULL low frequency signals excluding LFE information are not redirected to the subwoofer Low frequencies between the Subwoofer L R and any or all of the other speaker channels can be duplicated To do this select the FULL SUB crossover setting for the front center side or rear speakers Making this selection can result in excessive bass 3 23 S etup Lexicon SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS continued High pass Filter Low pass Filter dB dB 0 DEI IU BEE BENI REG a 10 20 50 100 200 500 1k Hz High pass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave The curves in the graph Low pass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave The curves in the graph above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting From left to right the above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting From left to right the curves represent crossover settin
237. r position Illustration C shows the right of center position Set the SOURCE parameter to RIGHT Begin playback of the external calibration source When playback of the external calibration source is in progress set the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in the right ear To confirm the LISTENER POS and SPEAKER ANGLE parameter settings set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT amp RIGHT If the PANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated the sound should be perceived to come from all around the primary listening position If not go back to Step 1 and repeat the cali bration procudure 5 14 12 Mode Adjust 2 CH SURROUND 01057 BE This mode designed for playback of stereo sources sends the left channel to Front Side and Rear Left channels and the right channel to Front Side and Rear Right channels and sums the Left and Right for the center It is recommended for background music Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 2 CHANNEL This mode designed for playback of stereo sources sends the left and right channels to the Front L R and Subwoofer channels It is recom mended for two speaker playback with subwoofers and for comparison purposes with other listening modes Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings SUB LEVEL 0dB OFF 30dB
238. r speaker make sure a custom as opposed to a THX speaker setup is selected Then make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu CENTER parameter is set to NONE A humming sound is present in the audio 1 Ifa cable TV connection is present disconnect the cable from the wall outlet If this eliminates the humming sound a ground loop isolation device is required Contact your dealer or the cable provider for assistance 2 Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem Once the problem is identified make sure the associated com ponent is properly grounded and connected to the same elec trical circuit as the MC 12 6 2 12 Troubleshooting amp Maintenance The MC 12 is powered on but there is no video 1 Examine the video cables particularly the S video cables to ensure a good connection to the associated component 2 Checkthe INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN and COMPONENT IN parameters to ensure the appropriate video connector is assigned to the selected input RF interference is present in the audio or video 1 Make sure the MC 12 is not positioned near unshielded TV or FM antennas cable TV decoders and other RF emitting devices 2 Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables wherever possible The MC 12 is exhibiting erratic behavior 1 Set the rear panel power switch to the off position Wait 10 seconds Then set the rear panel power switch to the on position 2
239. rated Pressing the remote control 7 5 button will cause LIVE to become uncalibrated LIVE requires 2 microphones available in a kit from your authorized Lexicon dealer If you already own the Lexicon 4 microphone kit there is no need to purchase the 2 microphone kit These microphones should be permanently mounted in the listening room Performing LIVE CALIBRATION with any microphones other than those in the kit can produce undesirable results To achieve the proper LIVE effect your system should be configured with a minimum of 4 speakers Front L R and either side L R or Rear L R If no subwoofer is present the crossover setting of the Front L R speakers should be set to FULL Proper microphone placement both during calibration and when running LIVE is essential to achieving the desired results Suggested microphone placement instructions and illustrations are included in this section The location of the sound source piano guitar voices etc is not critical LIVE will compensate for sounds that are closer to one micro phone or another CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES MC 12 Rear Panel MICROPHONE INPUTS eq CAUTION The Lexicon microphones require careful handling Dropping or otherwise physically abusing the microphones can cause calibration errors or irreparable damage to the microphone The microphone wires also require careful handling Do not sharply bend the wires or place objects
240. red off standby mode is not available 2 ACINPUT CONNECTOR Provides power to the MC 12 through the supplied power cord 3 wire 10 amp IEC 320 3 DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS S PDIF amp AES EBU Provide digital audio input in all zones Six S PDIF coaxial six S PDIF optical 5 TosLink 1 OMJ and one AES EBU XLR input connectors are available These connectors are compatible with PCM 44 1 48 88 2 and 96kHz Dolby Digital and DTS ES sources These connectors are not compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources 4 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS Provide analog audio input Eight stereo analog audio input connectors labeled 1 to 8 are available Connectors labeled 6 7 and 8 can be configured as 5 1 channel connectors When a 5 1 channel analog audio source is present in the Main Zone input signals are sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in the table below When a 5 1 channel analog source is present in the Main Zone and the INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN or RECORD IN parameter is set to DMIX only the L and R input signals are sent to the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors Input Connector Output Connector L amp R Front L R C Center SUB Subwoofer L R amp LFE LS amp RS Side L R and Rear L R 5 MAIN ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide analog audio output in the Main Zone Ten connectors labeled Front L R Center LFE Subwoofer L R Side L R and Rear L R
241. results for each individual speaker A value indicates that no errors occurred during the calibration procedure An ERROR message indicates that a value was calculated but at least one error occurred during the calibration proce dure Press the or arrow button to high light the speaker calibration parameter you want Then press the button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker A message similar to the one shown above will display Refer to the table on 3 51 for informa tion about all possible speaker calibration messages DISTANCES amp LEVELS AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES LEVELS ERROR AUTO VALUES APPLIED PRESS gt TO VIEW DETAILS When the MC 12 is finished calibrating speaker distances and output levels the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP screen displays indicating the results for each calibration procedure e An OK message indicates that no errors occurred during the calibration proce dure An ERROR message indicates that a value was calculated but at least one error occurred during calibration Press the arrow button to high light the desired calibration procedure DISTANCES displays the AUTO DIS TANCES screen shown in the left column of this table LEVELS displays the AUTO LEVELS screen shown in the right column of this table Press the arrow button to select this procedure Refer to the instructions in the appropri ate column to view more detailed res
242. revendeur gt Disimballaggio ed Ispezione Dopo aver disimballato l unit salvi tutto materiale d imballaggio in caso Lei abbia bisogno di spedire l unit Ispezioni attentamente i moduli ed il materiale d imballaggio per vedere se riportano segni di danno Riporti subito ogni segno di danno al corriere riferisca il malfunzionamento dell attrezzatura al suo rivenditore PT Retirando a Embalagem e Inspecionando Depois de desembalar a unidade guarde a embalagem caso precise enviar a unidade manuten o Inspecione cuidadosamente o m dulo e a embalagem procurando sinais de dano Avise loja qualquer tipo de dano ou mal funcionamento do equipamento 1 Getting Started About 2 pic ie dbi DEEP 1 2 Highlights 1 4 Product Registration 1 5 Installation 1 5 Remote Control Battery Installation 1 6 Getting Started Lexicon ABOUT THE MC 12 Thank you for purchasing the MC 12 Digital Controller a reference quality 12 channel audio and video control center with independent zone monitoring to provide control of input source selection in three zones at the same time As flexible as it is powerful the MC 12 includes 12 configurable inputs each of which can be assigned to its 1
243. rrespond with the numbered items ipuT2 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT MAIN OUTPUTS RECORD OUTPUTS MC 12 PAMELA 3 LEXICON INC E a 9 ET d 1 2 INPUT 4 VIDEO CENTER SUBWOOFER SIDE EAR Fix ZONE 2 Var 010 o o 9 0 6 0 6 660 ag a E 09 056060 0 6 0 o o o mu 4 100 240V 50 60 Hz 90W LFE MICROPHONE INPUTS 2 e TRIGGER OUTPUTS AUDIO CE c US 28 PWR Lyi L2J 1 Power Switch 9 Video Input Connectors 2 AC Input Adaptor 10 Main Video Output Connectors 3 Digital Audio Input Connectors 11 Record Zone Video Output Connectors 4 Analog Audio Input Connectors 12 RS 232 Connectors 5 Main Zone Audio Output Connectors 13 Trigger Output Connectors 6 Zone 2 Audio Output Connectors 14 IR In Connector 7 Record Zone Audio Output Connectors 15 Microphone Input Connectors 8 Balanced Audio Output Connectors MC 12 Balanced 16 Removable Access Panel 12 Basic Operation Caution Never make or break connections to the MC 12 unless the MC 12 and all associated components are powered off 1 POWER SWITCH Use the Power switch to power the MC 12 on or off The and positions represent on and off status respectively When the MC 12 is powered on the front panel Standby button or remote control On button can be used to activate and deactivate standby mode When the MC 12 is powe
244. ry reason for the 10 second delay is to give you time to leave the listening space before automatic calibration begins If you choose to remain in the room your movements could affect the calibration results If you leave the room you can return in about 3 minutes the calibration procedure should be completed Press the arrow button to skip the countdown and begin LIVE calibration The MC 12 automatically activates LIVE calibration when the countdown ends When the LIVE calibration is finished the LIVE CALIBRATION results screen displays one of the two following messages CALIBRATION DONE Indicates that no errors occurred during the calibration procedure LIVE CALIBRATION TEST WILL BEGIN IN 10 PRESS SKIP COUNTDOWN LIVE CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS PLEASE WAIT LIVE CALIBRATION CALIBRATION DONE PRESS gt TO CONTINUE LIVE CALIBRATION SIGNAL TOO LOW PRESS TO CONTINUE SIGNAL TOO LOW Indicates that the microphones failed to pick up sufficient cali bration noise signals for calibration to complete After reading the message press to continue If the SIGNAL TOO LOW message appeared Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the MC 12 in microphone inputs 1 and 2 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection Examine the speakers and the associated amplifier to ensure that speaker wires are connected and
245. s on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 27 Mode Adjust Lexicon 2 amp 2 CHAN Lm e e These modes recommended for recording purposes send downmixed 5 1 channel or 6 1 channel DTS ES input signals to the front speakers and subwoofer as 2 channel Logic 7 encoded output signals Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER MIX 0dB 25 to 5dB SURROUND MIX 0dB 5 to 5dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES 0 127 to 127 MASTER LEVEL 0dB 5 to 5dB LFE MIX 0 0 20 0 to 0 0dB ES DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF SUB LEVEL 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 1a z FILM TANN BS The 5 1a LOGIC 7 FILM listening mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that uses Logic 7 decoding to derive seven channels from of 5 1 channel analog film sources with enhanced front steering This listening mode allows 5 1 channel analog sources to use bass management speaker crossovers speaker distance calibration and audio controls tone controls Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0 6 0 3 0dB 0 0dB FRONT STEERING FILM OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SU
246. s are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is active THX Ultra2 decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX parameter is set to OFF When THX Ultra2 decoding is activated e Adaptive de correlation is applied to increase the perceived width of the listening space De correlation of the mono surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround field in home theaters e ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 32 for more information The 5 1a THX SurEX listening mode The 5 1a THX SurEX listening mode is available when both side and rear speakers are present and THX surround EX decoding is active THX Surround EX decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON When THX Surround EX decoding is activated Matrix decoding is applied to derive three surround channels from 5 1 channel analog sources The 5 1a THX listening mode The 5 1a THX listening mode is available when neither THX Ultra2 nor THX Surround EX decoding is active Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SURROUND EX OFF ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0 to 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions 5 30 12 Mode Adjust 5 1a THX MUSIC The 5 1a THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for pl
247. s assigned The INPUT SETUP DIGITAL IN parameter can assign a digital audio input connector for the selected input The MC 12 sends the analog audio from the assigned input to the Main Zone audio output connectors The assigned digital audio input connector is ignored Note the following The MC 12 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT parameter to ANALOG when no digital audio input connector is assigned The INPUT SETUP gt ANALOG IN parameter can assign an analog audio input connector for the selected input When LIVE is the selected analog input the MAIN ADVANCED INPUT SELECT parameter is forced to ANALOG and ANALOG BYPASS is disabled The MC 12 toggles between sending digital or analog audio input to the Main Zone audio output connectors based on the input source that is present Example The MC 12 selects the assigned digital audio input when a compatible digital source is present The MC 12 does not select the assigned analog audio input when a compatible digital source is present The MC 12 selects the assigned analog audio input connector when no compatible digital source is present The MC 12 selects the assigned analog connector if no digital source is present The MC 12 selects the assigned analog audio input connector when an analog source such as an SACD is present Note the following The MC 12 automatically sets the MAIN ADVANCED INPUT SELECT parameter to AUTO when both
248. s or more than 30 feet 9 14m from any one speaker The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement during the micro phone check The microphones are positioned on the floor along the perimeter of the listening space making it difficult for the MC 12 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for the actual listening positions Microphone Center Subwoofer Front Right 3 45 Setup Lexicon POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION continued P RO P E R microphone positioning for automatic calibration During the automatic calibration do not X Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of the listening positions or space X Position the microphones at spots where the listeners heads will not be during listening X Obstruct the line of sight path between the microphones and the speakers X Position the microphones on the floor on seat cushions or in locations obstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes might obscure calibration noise signals X Position the microphones within 2 feet 0 61m of speakers and walls or more than 30 feet 9 14m from any one speaker The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement during the microphone check The microphones are positioned on seat cushions rather than in spots where the listener s heads will be during liste
249. s selected it is activated whenever a new input is selected or an appropriate input source is present In the menus at the bottom of the page the INPUT SETUP menu has been modified for the following examples The following example describes when a preferred listening mode is activated If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2 channel source is present the L7 FILM listening mode is activated If a 5 1 channel analog source is present the 5 1a 17 FILM listening mode is activated If a DTS ES source is present the DTS ES L7 FILM listening mode is activated gt DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN 1 ANALOG IN 222226 gt 0101 2 ANLG IN LVL AUTO i FILM VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 n TV COMPONENT IN 1 MUSIC 2 CH ig t5 MUSIC SURR 5 1 7 FILM 7 its COM MOVIE 5 1a rz FILM PLII MUSIC MIC LIVE MED THX ONT Ea ats FILM times 5 MUSIC dits E 2 USE LAST DVD1 5 1a MODE 5 1a 121 FILM 5 1a 12 MUSIC 5 1 THX 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL USE LAST MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED DVD1 MODE LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE USE LAST DVD1 00D MODE 5 115 FILM 5 1 TV 5 1 77 MUSIC THX DIGITAL 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO USE LAST DOPRO LOGIC NIGHTCLUB CONC
250. screen When TOP is selected the two line status appears near the top of the display device screen When CENTER is selected 3 63 Setup Lexicon the two line status appears centered on the display device screen When BOTTOM is selected the two line status appears near the bottom of the display device screen FORMAT SECAM PAL NTSC EX 8 Controls the compatibility between the composite and S video output connectors the video switcher and the display device Select the setting that is compatible with the source components and the display device Note The FORMAT parameter has no effect on the component video output connector BACKGROUND EX Determines the on screen display background When ON is selected the on screen display appears over a solid blue or gray background depending on the display device When OFF is selected the on screen display appears over the video input signal ON OFF Note When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF the on screen display automatically deactivates when the display device is connected to the Main Zone component video output connector REMOTE STATE Ext gt e Activates the remote control command bank indicator a letter that appears in the top right corner of the on screen display to indicate the command bank from which the MC 12 last received a command The table below indicates the letter that represents each command bank ON OFF
251. should begin with the parameter set to the lowest setting then make adjustments accordingly Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes 1 to 100ms OFF 5 41 Mode Adjust Lexicon LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION amp PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS continued RE EQUALIZER Simulates high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters When set to ON the MC 12 applies a high frequency filter When set to OFF the MC 12 does not apply a high frequency filter It is recommended that you set this parameter to ON for film sources as many films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization Available in L7 FILM L7 TV DPLII THX DPLIIx THX 5 1 L7 FILM 5 1 L7 TV THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX THX DTS ES L7 FILM DTS ES THX ULTRA2 DTS ES THX 5 1a L7 FILM 5 1a THX ULTRA 5 1a THX SurEX 5 1a THX modes ON OFF REAR DLY OFFSET Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the arrival time of rear speaker signals It is recommended that you increase the setting when using side and rear speakers that are located close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired in the listening space Available in All Logic 7 modes and PANORAMA mode OFF 1 to 30ms REAR L R Controls the output level of the audio output connector labeled Rear L R Available in all except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS
252. soal de servi o qualificado Removendo coberturas o expor o a voltagens perigosas gem perigosa e n o isolada no recinto voltagem que pode ser suficiente para constituir um risco de choque Esse tri ngulo que aparece no seu console alerta para a presenca de volta tantes de opera o e manuten o neste manual Esse tri ngulo ques aparece no seu console alerta para instru es impor vii Introduction Lexicon DANSK VIGTIG INFORMATION OM SIKKERHED Gem denne vejledning til senere brug Folg alle anvisninger og advarsler apparatet Apparatet skal altid tilsluttes den korrekte sp nding Der henvises til brugsanvis ningen der indeholder specifikationer for stromforsyning Der gores opmaerksom pa at ved varierende driftsspzendinger kan det blive n dvendigt at bruge andre led nings og eller stiktyper Apparatet ikke monteres i et kabinet uden ventilation eller lige over andet udstyr der udvikler varme f eks forsteerkere Den maksimale omgivelsestempera tur ved drift der st r opfort i specifikationerne skal overholdes Der er ventilations bninger i kabinettet For at sikre apparatets drift og hindre over phedning disse bninger ikke blokeres eller tildeekkes Stik aldrig noget ind igennem ventilationsabningerne og pas aldrig at spilde nogen form for v ske apparatet Udgangsstik fra audioforsteerkere aldrig s ttes direkte i apparatet Apparatet ikke uds
253. sources Logic 7 decoding LIVE Lexicon Environment Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic Il and Dolby Pro Logic decoding DTS 96 24 DTS NEO 6 and DTS ES discrete and matrix decoding Intelligent Variable THX Ultra2 and THX Surround decoding THX Ultra2 Certification RS 232 connector for flash memory software upgrades and configuration backups 2 digital audio output connectors 3 trigger output connectors Rear panel IR input connector 4 microphone input connectors 2 internal expansion slots Removable access panel Balanced audio output connectors for all Main Zone and Zone 2 channels MC 12 Balanced only EQ option available 1 4 12 Getting Started PRODUCT REGISTRATION Please register the MC 12 Digital Controller within 15 days of purchase Register online at www lexicon com or complete and return the product registration card attached to the back cover of this user guide Retain the sales receipt as proof of warranty coverage INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS The MC 12 requires special care during installation to ensure optimal performance Pay particular attention to instructions below and to other precautions that appear throughout this user guide Do install the MC 12 on a solid flat level surface such as a table or shelf The MC 12 can also be installed in a standard 19 inch equipment rack using an optional rack mount kit available from an authorize
254. ssible future expansion Reserved for possible future expansion Activates the L7 MUSIC SURR listening mode 2 18 12 Basic Operation ABOUT THE ZONES The MC 12 features three zones of operation the Main Zone Zone 2 and the Record Zone The Main Zone controls audio and video sources in the primary listening space Zone 2 controls audio sources in the secondary listening space The Record Zone controls audio and video sources sent to recording devices or to a third listening space These zones have separate digital audio receivers and dedicated analog source selectors that allow for independent input selection in each zone The MC 12 can process input sources in three zones at the same time For example the MC 12 can play a DVD in the Main Zone while playing a CD in Zone 2 while sending satellite receiver signals to a VCR in the Record Zone The following are exceptions to independent zone operation 1 When a Dolby Digital or DTS ES source is present in the Main Zone the same Dolby Digital or DTS ES source can also be present in Zone 2 or the Record Zone However a different Dolby Digital or DTS ES source cannot be present in Zone 2 or the Record Zone 2 Main Zone multi channel audio can be down mixed in Zone 2 or the Record Zone when all of the following conditions are met e A Dolby Digital or DTS ES source is present in the Main Zone e The Main Zone input is also selected in Zone 2 or t
255. status indicates the current input input source and volume level selected in Zone 2 2 19 Basic Operation Lexicon RECORD ZONE TWO LINE STATUS Opens on the on screen and front panel displays whenever the MC 12 detects AT 340B Record Zone status change The Record Zone two line status indicates the current input input source and volume level selected in the Record Zone The ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter can control the length of time for which the two line status appears on the on screen and front panel displays The ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu POSITION parameter can control the vertical alignment of the two line status on the display device screen Note When the display device is connected to a component video output con nector and the ADVANCED menu COMPONENT OSD parameter is set to OFF the display device does not show the on screen display including the two line status STATUS MENUS The STATUS menu contains parameters that provide information about the current input source and listening mode STATUS menus are available for 2 channel Dolby Digital DTS ES analog digital and LIVE input sources STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current input source and listening mode Some STATUS menus also include level meters that indicate fluctuating audio input levels Unlike most other menus STATUS menus cannot be opened by selecting menu options The remote control command seq
256. t right and center speakers When set to FILM maximum front steering is applied to the center channel When set to MUSIC moderate front steering is applied When set to MSURR minimum front steering is applied When set to OFF no front steering is applied It is recommended that you set this parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sources and to MUSIC MSURR or OFF for music sources Available in L7 TV L7 MUSIC L7 MUSIC SURR all 5 1 L7 modes all DTS L7 modes and all 5 1a L7 modes INPUT BALANCE Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input connectors compensating for audio input sources with audible channel imbalance Available in PANORAMA mode OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM L lt to lt l gt to gt R Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector labeled LFE The OUTPUT LEVELS menu does not include the LFE parameter unless an LFE subwoofer is present Available in All Dolby Digital DTS and 5 1a modes LFE MIX Controls the output level of LFE information the 5 1 channel in a 5 1 channel or 6 1 channel input source that is sent to the audio output labeled Subwoofer Low frequencies from up to seven other channels might be combined with the LFE information to create the subwoofer output signal which significantly increases subwoofer output levels 20 0 or 10 0 to 0 0dB Careful adjustment of this parameter allows achievement of proper tonal balance and reduces the risk of subwoo
257. t signals are still passed to the Record Zone video output connectors When ENABLED is selected audio and video input signals are passed to the Record Zone audio and video output connectors 3 21 Setup Lexicon SPEAKER SETUP s Emu Selecting the SETUP menu SPEAKERS option opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu which configures the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup The Main Zone includes 10 unbalanced audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center LFE Subwoofer L R Side L R and Rear L R Two additional audio output connectors labeled Aux L R are provided for future expansion MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS EX Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu SET CROSSOVERS option opens the CROSSOVER SETUP menu which configures a custom or THX speaker setup 5 SET CROSSOVERS Note The MC 12 Balanced also includes 10 balanced Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center LFE Subwoofer L R Side L R and Rear L R Two additional audio output connectors labeled Aux L R are provided for future expansion CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP CHECK MICROPHONES THX SETUP AUTOMATIC MANUAL R SR RR SET CROSSOVERS 4 A 80HZ 80Hz BEFORE CALIBRATIN ORE C G 80Hz sis K wA aD 80Hz 80
258. t speaker connected to the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Front L When the speaker distance has been measured press the 4 and v arrow buttons to set the parameter to the closest available value 3 53 Setup Lexicon PERFORMING MANUAL OUTPUT LEVEL CALIBRATION SETUP c SPEAKERS 5 MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option displays the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu to manually calibrate output levels Note the following You should use a Sound Pressure Level SPL meter to manually calibrate output levels An SPL meter is a device that measures the relative loudness of the speakers to ensure accurate output level calibration SPL meters are available at Radio Shack Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening position placing the SPL meter at the approximate location where the listener s head will be during listening SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS SET CROSSOVERS LOCK OPTIONS BEFORE CALIBRATING LIVE CALIBRATION MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATION Cr EN RR 0 098 0 008 0 098 Output levels for speakers that are not included in the speaker setup cannot be adjusted during the internal noise test These output levels can be adjusted during the extern
259. tal audio input connector is assigned The appearance of the ANALOG IN menu depends on the configu ration of the analog audio input connectors e The ANALOG IN menu A below appears when the REAR PANEL CONFIG menu 8 STEREO INPUTS option is selected The ANALOG IN menu B below appears when the REAR PANEL CONFIG menu 5 STEREO amp 5 1 ANLG option is selected MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST SETUP INPUT SETUP INPUTS DVD1 SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 000 fats When no digital audio input connector is assigned the MC 12 automatically sets the e MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter to ANALOG e INPUT SELECT menu ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG e INPUT SELECT menu RECORD IN parameter to ANLG Note LIVE cannot be selected until LIVE CALIBRATION is run When the ANALOG IN selection is LIVE no other analog inputs 1 8 or digital inputs can be selected for that input DVD1 ANALOG IN ANALOG 1 ANALOG 2 ANALOG 3 ANALOG 4 ANALOG 5 ANALOG 6 or ANALOG 1 ANALOG 2 ANALOG 3 ANALOG 4 ANALOG 5 5 1 ANLG 6 8 NONE LIVE ANALOG 7 ANALOG 8 NONE 5 1a FILM LIVE B LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED A ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED 12 Setup ANLG I
260. tected AUTO ON OFF DTS ES listening modes are available when DTS ES decoding is engaged DTS listening modes are available when DTS ES decoding is not engaged Refer to the DTS ES Decoding section that begins on page 5 22 for more information Note the following e DTS ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present e When the Shift command bank is activated pressing the remote control DTS button while a DTS ES source is present adjusts the ES DECODING parameter cycling through the AUTO ON and OFF settings e The DTS ES STATUS menu includes an SB level meter when the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a 5 1 channel DTS source is present or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to AUTO and a 5 1 channel matrix encoded or 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES source is present This parameter is available in all DTS modes EX DECODING Controls Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding which extracts a rear channel from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources recorded with or without Dolby Digital Surround EX When ON Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged for all 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources When OFF Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is disen gaged for all 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources When AUTO is selected Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged when a flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected Dolby Digital Surr
261. tempt to operate the unit if it has been dropped damaged exposed to liq uids or if it exhibits a distinct change in performance indicating the need for ser vice This unit should only be opened by qualified service personnel Removing covers will expose you to hazardous voltages Sufficient to constitute a risk of shock This triangle which appears on your component alerts you to important operating and maintenance instructions in this accompanying literature DEUTSCH WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE Bewahren Sie diese Anleitungen zur spateren Benutzung auf Befolgen Sie alle Anleitungen und alle Warnhinweise auf dem Gerat Betreiben Sie das Ger t immer mit der korrekten Netzspannung Angaben ber den Strombedarf entnehmen Sie bitte den Betriebsanweisungen des Herstellers Bei unterschiedlichen Betriebsspannungen kann die Verwendung anderer Netzkabel und oder Anschluf stecker erforderlich werden Bauen Sie das Ger t nie in ein unbel ftetes Rack oder direkt ber W rme erzeu genden Ger ten wie Verstarkern ein Beachten Sie die in der Produktspezifikation aufgef hrte maximale Umgebungstemperatur f r den Betrieb Schlitze und Offnungen in der Box dienen der Bel ftung damit das Gerat zuverlas sig l uft und sich nicht berhitzt Diese Offnungen d rfen nicht abgedeckt oder blockiert werden Auch d rfen keine Gegenstande in sie hineingesteckt werden Versch tten Sie niemals Fl ssigkeiten gleich welcher Art auf das Ger t
262. ter settings for each input SAT RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD ENABLED VCR RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD BLOCKED CD RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT 44 1kHz RECORD ENABLED PVR RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD BLOCKED GAME RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD ENABLED TAPE RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD BLOCKED TUNER RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD ENABLED AUX RECORD ADV ANLG IN LVL 0dB DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD ENABLED A 8 12 Appendix MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP FRONT L R SPEAKERS FULL FULL SUB 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION CUSTOM SETUP FRONT L R 80 Hz 80 Hz SIDE L R 80 Hz REAR L R 80 Hz SUB L R MONO SUB XOVER 80 Hz LFE OFF THX ULTRA2 SUB OFF BGC N A ASA APART REAR L R SPEAKERS FULL FULL SUB 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz NONE SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL
263. the calibration noise set to OFF requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibra tion disc L R LIMITER ON OFF EET BI e L R LIMITER Limits low frequency signals sent to the subwoofer or redirected to other speakers To set the L R LIMITER parameter e Select ON to restrict the output level of the low frequency signals to the L R LIMIT ADJ parameter setting e Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level regard less of the L R LIMIT ADJ parameter setting L R LIMIT ADJ 75 to 120dB Eat gt BIS u e EES e L R LIMITER ADJ Specifies the output level restriction applied to the Subwoofer L R output connectors and to other Main Zone audio output connectors to which low frequency signals are redirected To set the L R LIMIT ADJ parameter 1 Select the L R LIMIT ADJ parameter The parameter initally sets to 75dB 2 Press the a and arrow buttons to change the parameter value The selected output level restriction is applied when the L R LIMITER parameter is set to ON LFE LIMITER ON OFF Ec sreaens c manoa EI Bass peax umres 2 E Limits low frequency signals sent to the LFE subwoofer or redirected to other speakers To set the LFE LIMITER parameter e Select ON to restrict the output level of the low frequency signals to the LFE LIMIT ADJ parameter setting e Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level regard less of the LFE LIM
264. ting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option displays the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu to manually calibrate speaker distances MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SPEAKER SETUP CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING To manually calibrate speaker distances 1 Follow the menu path shown above to select SPEAKER DISTANCES The SPEAKER DISTANCES menu shown above will open on the on screen display Press the or arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker distance parameter Then press the arrow button to select the highlighted speaker distance parameter SET CROSSOVERS 0 0ft MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES SPEAKER DISTANCES FRONT LEFT LEVELS CALIBRATION CENTER UE FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT 0 REAR RIGHT o oft R SAN RR i q n REAR LEFT QUE 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m rq MONO SUB gt SUB RIGHT E94 Cl SL AL LFE WLS METERS SUB q Y D UNITS 5558 gt FEET To determine the appropriate speaker distance measure the distance between the primary listening position and the front of the speaker For example when the FRONT LEFT parameter is selected measure the distance between the primary listening position and the front of the front lef
265. tiple rows position the microphones X At the approximate spot where the listener s head will be during listening 4 Inaclear line of sight path with the speakers In a location unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals V At least 2 feet 0 61m from all speakers and walls but within 30 feet 9 14m of all speakers The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement when calibrating for multiple listening positions in multiple rows Each microphone is positioned in a single listening position within rows allowing the MC 12 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for a larger listening area at the expense of a single listening position Microphone Center Subwoofer 3 44 12 Setup RO P E R microphone positioning for automatic calibration During the automatic calibration do not X Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of the listening positions or space X Position the microphones in spots where the listeners heads will not be during listening X Obstruct the line of sight path between the microphones and the speakers X Position the microphones on the floor on seat cushions or in locations obstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes might obscure calibration noise signals X Position the microphones within 2 feet 0 61m of speakers and wall
266. to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions MONO LOGIC wont nouusr 5 oa This mode designed for playback of mono sources uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to use all channels This dramatically increases the perceived width and sense of envelopment of the listening space Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EFFECT LVL 9dB 12dB to 6dB ACADEMY FILTER ON ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions Note When the remote control Shift command bank is activated pressing the TVL button activates the MONO LOGIC listening mode for 2 channel sources 5 15 Mode Adjust Lexicon MONO SURROUND This mode designed for playback of mono sources sends the mono source to all channels Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 for detailed descriptions MONO This mode designed for playback of mono sources sends mono sources to the center channel Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings SUB LEVEL 0dB OFF 30dB to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to
267. to OFF analog audio input levels When set to ON the input levels are automatically monitored and optimized When the input signal is too high the input levels are quickly decreased to avoid overload When the input signal is too low the input levels are slowly increased to maximize the signal to noise ratio and dynamic range When set to OFF the 2 channel and 5 1 analog audio input levels are not automatically monitored and optimized Instead input levels must be adjusted with the ANLG IN LVL MANUAL parameter AUTO GAIN 0 00B R Iz FILM 5 1 4 FILM d s ETE 5 1a 21 FILM LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL RECORD IN DIGITAL RECORD ADVANCED 3 9 Setup Lexicon ASSIGNING AUDIO amp VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS continued MANUAL Provides manual adjustment of 2 channel and 5 1 channel when the MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF analog audio input levels Lower levels cause more noise while higher levels pose a risk of overload distortion When manual adjustments are made the MC 12 automatically sets the ANLG IN LVL menu AUTO parameter to OFF deactivating automatic input level adjustment Manual input level adjustments are retained when the AUTO parameter is ON 18 to 12 dB Note When the AUTO parameter is ON the MC 12 will not make adjustments that exceed the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter setting AUTO GAIN Emn LOS mi Indicates
268. to the speaker connected to the corresponding Main Zone audio output connector 18 0db to 12 0dB UNITS FEET METERS EX c EE e LTEM Determines the unit of measurement in which speaker distances are calculated on ALL speaker distance menus When FEET is selected the MC 12 calculates speaker distances in feet When METERS is selected the MC 12 calculates speaker distances in meters When the UNITS parameter setting is adjusted the MC 12 automatically adjusts speaker distances to the closest available value in the selected unit of measurement Speaker Distance Settings Output Level Settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Setting Default Setting Possible Setting FRONT L R 0 0ft 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m 0 0dB 18 0 to 12 0dB CENTER 0 0ft 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m 0 0dB 18 0 to 12 0dB FRONT RIGHT 0 0ft 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m 0 0dB 18 0 to 12 0dB SIDE LEFT 0 0ft 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m 0 0dB 18 0 to 12 0dB REAR LEFT 0 0ft 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m 0 0dB 18 0 to 12 0dB REAR RIGHT 0 0ft 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m 0 0dB 18 0 to 12 0dB SIDE RIGHT 0 0ft 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m 0 0dB 18 0 to 12 0dB MONO SUB 0 0ft 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m 0 0dB 18 0 to 12 0dB SUB RIGHT 40 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m 18 0 to 12 0dB LFE N At 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m 18 0 to 12 0dB UNITS FEET FEET METERS When one subwoofer is include
269. toring the factory default Note When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter is automatically set to OFF 5 36 12 Mode Adjust LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION amp PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS 5 SPKR ENHANCE Simulates 7 channel playback in 5 channel speaker configurations When set to ON the MC 12 provides an increased sense of spaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers This enhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers are positioned to the side of the primary listening position or when the primary listening position is located against the rear wall The effec tiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space For best results it is recommended that you position the surround speakers to the left and right sides of the primary listening position Available in all Logic 7 modes ACADEMY FILTER When set to ON restores the proper tonal balance of older mono film sources that have much narrower frequency responses than more recent mono film sources Available in MONO LOGIC and 5 1 MONO LOGIC modes AUTO AZIMUTH Maximizes matrix steering accuracy When set to ON the MC 12 continually monitors the 2 channel input signal and automatically adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to ensure that signals are sent to the appr
270. toris 3 DI 5 4 Mode Family Selection Buttons sese enn 5 4 Listening Mode Descriptions 5 5 Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions 5 37 Mode Parameter Relationships 5 45 Mode Adjust Lexicon MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP MODE ADJUST 5 1a m FILM 5 1a 61 MUSIC 5 1 121 FILM wi TV 121 MUSIC 121 MUSIC SURR 195 Oo MOV Oo PLilx MUS OO EX Oo PLII MOVIE Oo PLII MUSIC 5 1a IHX MUSIC 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 5 1a BYPASS 2CH BYPASS LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE These listening mode names differ depend ing on the current input source speaker setup and parame ter settings Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions begin ning on page 5 5 for more information Oo 195 Oo PRO LOGIC dits a CIN MUSIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO 5 1 121 FILM 5 1 Gi TV 5 1 121 MUSIC Tex THX MUSIC 5 1 MOV 5 1 MUS Oo DIGITAL 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO dts 21 FILM MODE ADJUST Selecting MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST displays the MODE ADJUST menu to select a listening mode Selecting a listening mode opens the corresponding listening mode menu to custom
271. uence outlined below must be executed To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current input source 1 Press and release the remote control SHIFT button 2 Press and release the remote control STAT button The first page of the STATUS menu for the current input source appears in the on screen and front panel displays If the STATUS menu includes a second page the PG1 indicator appears in the top right corner of the menu Press and release the STAT button again to open the second page If the STATUS menu does not include a second page pressing and releasing the STAT button again closes the menu 3 When the desired STATUS menu page opens press the remote control MAIN button then press the 4 arrow button to scroll up or down through the list of available parameters 4 Press the STAT button to close the STATUS menu In some cases you must press STAT twice in succession to close the STATUS menu Note STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current input source and listening mode These parameters cannot be adjusted 2 20 12 Basic Operation STATUS MENU DESCRIPTIONS The table beneath each description lists the default and possible settings for each parameter 2CH STATUS Provides information about 2 channel input sources Features L and R level meters Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE The current listening mode INPUT TYPE ANLG PCM S
272. uency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a limited frequency range of up to 120Hz The 5 1 PLIIx MOVIE listening mode is only available when the front side and rear speakers are present Note the following e The 5 1 PLIIx MOV listening mode cannot be assigned as the preferred listening mode for 2 channel sources However when the 2 CH parameter is set to USE LAST the MC 12 automati cally activates the 5 1 PLIIx MOV listening mode if the 5 1 MOV listening mode was activated the last time a 2 channel source was present e The 5 1 PLIIx MOV mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EX DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0 to 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 5 35 CUSTOM Refer to page 5 35 See Listening Mode Menu Option amp Parameter Descriptions on page 5 37 5 1 PLIIx MUS The 5 1 PLIIx MUS MUSIC listening mode is designed to playback 7 1 discrete channels decoded from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital music sources The 5 1 PLIIx MUSIC listening mode can also be used with other types of Dolby Digital sources with mixed results The seven main channels are full frequency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a limited frequency range of up to 120Hz The 5 1 MUSIC listeni
273. ults for each individual speaker LEVELS AUTO LEVELS gt FRONT LEFT FRONT LEFT OK CENTER Refer to the table FRONT RIGHT 3 51 for information dot SIDE RIGHT all possible speaker calibra REAR RIGHT tion messages REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT MONO SUB SUB RIGHT LFE When the MC 12 is finished calibrating output levels the AUTO LEVELS screen displays indicating the results for each individual speaker A value indicates that no errors occurred during the calibration procedure ERROR message indicates that a value was calculated but at least one error occurred during the calibration proce dure Press the 4 or arrow button to high light the desired speaker calibration arameter Then press the arrow utton to view more detailed results for the selected speaker A message similar to the one shown above displays Referto the table on page 3 51 for infor mation about all possible speaker calibra tion messages To fine tune individual speaker distances and output levels refer to the MANUAL CALIBRATION section that begins on page 3 52 You should also configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS parameter settings See SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERS on page 3 57 3 49 Setup Lexicon PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION continued DISTANCES SET DISTANCES AUTO DISTANCES AUTO DISTANCES i sA D 0 0 0 0 SIDE LEFT 2s MONO SUB lt wA Di e RIGHT 0 0ft 0 0 0 01 0 01 Use the SET DISTA
274. up does not include a subwoofer The MC 12 redirects low frequency signals to the speakers with the lowest crossover points unless the 5 1a BYPASS listening mode is activated In this instance configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD A SACD player to redirect low frequency signals When a THX speaker setup is selected the SUBWOOFER L R output connectors are configured for a speaker setup that includes one subwoofer and the SUB L R parameter cannot be adjusted SUB XOVER FULL 30 to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE EX BELEN Q set crossovers sue xoven Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled SUBWOOFER L R when a custom speaker setup is selected Opens the SUB XOVER menu to select a crossover point for the SUBWOOFER L R output connectors Select FULL to send a full range signal to the subwoofer s Otherwise select the crossover point equal to the lowest crossover point of the other speakers When a THX speaker setup is selected a THX 80Hz crossover point is applied to the SUBWOOFER L R output connectors and the SUB L R parameter cannot be adjusted LFE ON OFF EX I c Eze ser crossovers T cusrom seru Ud Activates and deactivates the Main Zone audio output connector labeled LFE when a custom speaker setup is selected When a custom speaker setup is selected e Select ON to activate the LFE output connector LFE information is sent to the LFE output connector e Select OFF to d
275. vels Calibration helps to ensure accurate output signal arrival time and level at the primary listening position However it is not a substitute for proper speaker placement Before calibrating speaker distances and output levels e Set crossover points for the Main Zone audio output connec tors Setting crossover points afterwards could invalidate calibrated output levels The CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu can be used to set crossover points e Eliminate extraneous noise in the listening space including conversation air conditioners and sounds that filter in through open doors and windows e Move or remove objects including people blocking the line of sight path between the microphones or SPL meter and the speakers SPEAKER CALIBRATION PARAMETERS The table on the next page indicates the speaker calibration param eters that can be used to set speaker distances and output levels for the speakers connected to the corresponding Main Zone audio output connectors These parameters are available on the speaker distance and output level menus shown throughout this section All parameters perform the same function whether automatic or manual calibration is selected SPEAKER DISTANCE PARAMETERS 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m Determine the distance between the primary listening position and the speaker connected to the corresponding Main Zone audio output connector OUTPUT LEVEL PARAMETERS Determine the output level of signals sent
276. ver point for the SIDE L R output connectors e Select FULL to send a full range signal to the side speakers Otherwise select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the side speakers e Select FULL SUB to send a full range signal to the side speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB L R outputs The set crossover point of the SUB L R parameter determines the upper range of duplicate bass Selecting the FULL SUB option can result in excessive bass e Select NONE when the speaker setup does not include side speakers The MC 12 will redirect side channel signals to the Rear L R output connectors If the REAR L R parameter is also set to NONE the MC 12 will redirect surround channel signals to the Front L R output connectors Note When the SIDE L R parameter is set to NONE Dolby Digital Surround EX THX Ultra2 THX Surround EX DTS ES decoding the ASA parameter and PLIIx modes are not available Ei BGS BESS EET When a THX speaker setup is selected a THX 80Hz crossover point is applied to the SIDE L R output connectors and the SIDE L R parameter cannot be adjusted 3 28 12 Setup REAR L R SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SETUP REAR PANEL CONFIG DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGERS LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING
277. wing distractions the two line status does not appear in the on screen display When OFF the display device does not show the on screen display including the two line status Note When the ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND parameter is OFF the display device using the component video output connector will not show the on screen display ZONE2 IN amp RECORD IN DIGITAL ANLG DMIX e ov Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input connectors assigned to the current Zone 2 and Record Zone inputs The table of the next page describes ZONE2 and RECORD IN parameter settings CAUTION When the ZONE2 or RECORD IN parameter is set to DIGITAL or ANLG the MC 12 recognizes some DTS encoded sources as audio signals not data signals and outputs loud digital noise from the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors 3 18 12 ZONE2 amp RECORD IN PARAMETER SETTINGS DIGITAL ANLG Analog DMIX Downmix The MC 12 passes digital audio from the the assigned input to the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors The assigned analog audio input is ignored Zones can be independently monitored Note the following e The MC 12 passes digital sources to all Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors MC 12 passes digital input signals directly to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors The MC 12 sends digital i

Lexicon MC-12 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents